Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 313
1 of 313

Summary of Content for Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

A LT

EA O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s 5

P0 01

20 03

D P

(0 2.

10 )

( G

T9 )

5P 00

12 00

3D P

A LT

EA In

gl s

( 02

.1 0)

Portada ALTEA.qxd:Maquetacin 1 30/3/10 11:36 Pgina 3

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.02.10

Portada ALTEA_interior.qxd:maquetacin 30/3/10 12:16 Pgina 3

efully to familiarise yourself with

ill help preserve its value.

s and parts changes.

, as it should be kept with the

Altea_EN.book Seite 1 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Foreword This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car

your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling w

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner

vehicle.

Altea_EN.book Seite 2 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Contents 3

shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical

ockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher

uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

onditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

tart-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

utomatic gearbox*/DSG automatic gearbox . .

andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

arking aid acoustic system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ruise control* (Cruise control - GRA) . . . . . . . .

ctical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS

BS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lectronic Stability Programme (ESP)* . . . . . . . .

ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .

conomical and environmentally friendly driving

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148

151

152

155

155

157

161

165

167

167

168

169

170

174

177

178

183

185

188

193

193

193

194

195

201

201

202

203

205

Altea_EN.book Seite 3 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Contents

Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dash panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and storage compartments . . . . . . . . . .

The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A

s

F

L

Air c

H

C

2

G

Driv

A

S

Ig

S

S

M

A

H

P

C

Pra

Inte

B

A

(A

E

Driv

R

E

E

D

5

6

7

7

7

10

16

17

19

19

21

24

28

30

30

34

37

41

44

46

46

48

51

55

55

55

57

60

61

68

77

87

87

88

92

95

95

101

103

105

107

109

111

114

114

122

125

126

130

133

133

134

136

138

140

Contents4

Altea_EN.book Seite 4 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . .

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, parts replacement and

modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .

Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre repair kit* (Tyre Mobility System) . . . . . . . .

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .

Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS) . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS) . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 66 kW (90 PS) . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS). With

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 PS).

With/without DPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 PS) . . . . . . .

Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

206

206

207

207

208

210

210

211

216

219

219

219

220

220

221

221

222

225

226

227

230

234

236

239

241

244

244

252

252

254

260

262

267

276

279

283

283

283

285

286

286

287

287

288

289

290

292

293

294

296

297

298

300

301

Manual structure 5

Manual structure What you should know before reading this manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the

vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will

not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the

equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual

refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when

otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in certain

versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions or model

years, or are only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol

does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

Indicates that the section is continued on the following page.

Indicates the end of a section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.

Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to

your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information on the protec-

tion of the environment.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

Altea_EN.book Seite 5 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Content6

Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised

way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to

chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large

parts which are:

1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat

belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Operating instructions Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your

vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-

able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and

certain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical Data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help

you to rapidly find the information you require.

Altea_EN.book Seite 6 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Safe driving 7

Safety Fir Technical Data

s a part of the occupant protection

the risk of injury in the event of acci-

afety of your passengers in danger. In the event

ipment may reduce the risk of injury. The

f the safety equipment in your SEAT:

e front and rear side seats,

nt seats,

r the front seats,

eat backrests.

ts*,

s for child seats in the rear side seats with the

straints,

e position and non-use position

n.

ned above works together to provide you and

t possible protection in the event of an accident.

Altea_EN.book Seite 7 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety First

Safe driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety

and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the owner's manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the owner's manual is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment i

system and can reduce

dent.

Never put your safety or the s

of an accident, the safety equ

following list includes most o

three-point seat belts,

belt tension limiters for th

belt tensioners for the fro

belt height adjustment fo

front airbags,

side airbags in the front s

curtain airbags,

active front head restrain

ISOFIX anchorage point

ISOFIX system,

height-adjustable head re

head restraints with in-us

adjustable steering colum

The safety equipment mentio

your passengers with the bes

Safe driving8

gers in the rear seats always have the

-use position page 14.

adjust the head restraints according to

propriate child seats and properly

age 46.

ing position. Instruct your passengers

r sitting position page 10.

curely. Instruct your passengers also to

roperly page 19.

ety?

determined by your driving style and

of all occupants.

sible for yourself and your passengers.

r driving safety is affected by any circum-

self as well as others on the road ,

be distracted from the traffic around you,

lephone conversations.

riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-

d speed limits.

Altea_EN.book Seite 8 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passen-

gers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,

how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and

your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety

equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your

passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.

Safety is everyone's business!

Before setting off

The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and

the safe operation of the vehicle.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note

the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working

properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the

surroundings.

Make sure all luggage is secured page 17.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according

to your size.

Ensure that the passen

head restraints in the in

Instruct passengers to

their height.

Protect children with ap

applied seat belts p

Assume the correct sitt

also to assume a prope

Fasten your seat belt se

fasten their seat belts p

What affects driving saf

Driving safety is largely

the personal behaviour

As a driver, you are respon

When your concentration o

stance, you endanger your

for this reason:

Do not allow yourself to

e.g. by passengers or te

Never drive when your d

tion, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws an

Safe driving 9

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 9 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and

weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least

every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

Safe driving10

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

he following adjustments for the driver:

el so that there is a distance of at least 25

g wheel and the centre of your chest

rwards or backwards so that you are able

, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with

angled .

ch the highest point of the steering

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head fig. 2.

upright position so that your backrests

Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver

Altea_EN.book Seite 10 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Proper sitting position for occupants

Proper sitting position for driver

The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a

safe and relaxed driving.

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend t

Adjust the steering whe

cm between the steerin

fig. 1.

Move the driver seat fo

to press the accelerator

your knees still slightly

Ensure that you can rea

wheel.

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

Move the backrest to an

completely against it.

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel

Safe driving 11

Safety Fir Technical Data

for front passenger

st sit at least 25 cm away from the

airbag can provide the greatest

he event that it is triggered.

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

the following adjustments for the front

ger seat back as far as possible .

n upright position so that your backrests

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head page 13.

otwell in front of the front passenger seat.

ecurely page 19.

e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-

r seat page 136.

tion of the front passenger can lead to severe

er seat so that there is at least 25 cm between sh panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, otect you properly.

Altea_EN.book Seite 11 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fasten your seat belt securely page 19.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under

control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver seat page 133.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Proper sitting position

The front passenger mu

dash panel so that the

possible protection in t

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend

passenger:

Move the front passen

Move the backrest to a

completely against it.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your seat belt s

It is possible to deactivate th

stances page 25.

Adjusting the front passenge

WARNING

An incorrect sitting posi injuries.

Adjust the front passeng your breastbone and the da the airbag system cannot pr

Safe driving12

otwell in front of the rear seat.

curely page 19.

d restraint system when you take children

6.

ear seat are not sitting properly, they could

properly in order to achieve maximum protec-

e optimal protection when backrests are in an engers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the seat belt increases.

Altea_EN.book Seite 12 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their

feet on the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for

use and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking

manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must

consider the following:

Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 14.

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your seat belt se

Use an appropriate chil

in the vehicle page 4

WARNING

If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint tion.

Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pass If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos

WARNING (continued)

Safe driving 13

Safety Fir Technical Data

properly in order to achieve maximum

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at the very least, at eye level

page 133

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could result in death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

d into their seats during a rear end collision. The

e backrest activates the active head restraint*

s rapidly forwards and upwards at the same

the distance between the occupant's head and

cing the risk of head injuries such as brain

Altea_EN.book Seite 13 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint

protection.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 3 and fig. 4.

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passenger's height.

Active head restraints*

Vehicle occupants are presse

resulting body pressure on th

on the front seat, which move

time. This movement reduces

the head restraint, thus redu

trauma.

Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Safe driving14

ar seat head restraints

restraints are an important part of the

d can reduce the risk of injuries in

s

Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position

Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label

Altea_EN.book Seite 14 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.

The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the passenger's height.

Note The active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant

applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the

seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head

restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous,

as the active head restraints will return to the original position immediately

and are thus once again ready.

Correct adjustment of re

Properly adjusted head

passenger protection an

most accident situation

Safe driving 15

Safety Fir Technical Data

itting positions

ition can lead to severe injuries to

timal protection only when the belt webs

ncorrect sitting positions substantially

tion of seat belts and increase the risk of

t belt position. As the driver, you are

occupants, especially children.

assume an incorrect sitting position in the

.

amples of sitting positions that could be

The list is not complete, but we would like to

.

icle is in motion:

,

r to the rear,

sh panel,

h,

e of a seat,

w,

a window,

dash panel,

surface of a seat,

Altea_EN.book Seite 15 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear outer seat head restraints

The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.

Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the

head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along

with the rear seat belts.

And one position for non-use.

To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges

with both hands in the direction of the arrow.

Centre rear head restraint

The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head

restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).

WARNING

Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.

Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.

Risk of injury in case of an accident!

Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 134.

Examples of incorrect s

An incorrect sitting pos

occupants.

Seat belts can provide op

are properly positioned. I

reduce the protective func

injury due to incorrect sea

responsible for all vehicle

Never allow anyone to

vehicle while travelling

The following list contains ex

dangerous for all occupants.

make you aware of this issue

Therefore, whenever the veh

Never stand in the vehicle

never stand on the seats,

never kneel on the seats,

never tilt your backrest fa

never lean against the da

never lie on the rear benc

never sit on the front edg

never sit sideways,

never lean out of a windo

never put your feet out of

never put your feet on the

never put your feet on the

Safe driving16

e pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in

port your feet properly and give you a good

n can lead to critical situations while driving.

e driver footwell. An object could move into al operation. In the event of a sudden driving

ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!

side

used which can be securely fastened

ot impair operation of the pedals.

ats are securely fastened during the trip

pedals .

ve the pedals clear and which are secured to

ou can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-

r floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

d, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-

s are always securely attached.

Altea_EN.book Seite 16 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell,

never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,

do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incor- rect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects

or floor mats.

Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and

clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-

tions.

Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely

fastened on the footwell.

If a brake circuit fails, the brak

order to stop the vehicle.

Wearing suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which sup

feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operatio

Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair ped or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of acc

Floor mats on the driver

Only floor mats may be

in the footwell and do n

Ensure that the floor m

and do not obstruct the

Only use floor mats which lea

prevent them from slipping. Y

fied dealership. Fasteners* fo

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructe ries.

Ensure that the floor mat

Safe driving 17

Safety Fir Technical Data

he luggage compartment and secure them on

traps to secure heavy objects.

res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-

ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.

d axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving e may change, leading to accidents, injuries

unattended, especially when the tailgate is to the luggage compartment, closing the door

apped and run the risk of death.

lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the e are no adults or children in the vehicle.

ers in the luggage compartment. Every belted in page 19.

le helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

on slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

tion slits are never covered.

Altea_EN.book Seite 17 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Stowing luggage

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in

the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the

driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.

Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the

luggage compartment.

Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-

ment.

Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings page 18.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious injuries.

Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.

Use suitable specialist s

During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide

Never exceed the allowe the allowed axle load or the characteristics of the vehicl and damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb in behind them; they will be tr

Never allow children to p the doors and tailgate when vehicle, make sure that ther

Never transport passeng passenger must be properly

Note Air circulation in the vehic

air escapes through ventilati

ment. Ensure that the ventila

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Safe driving18

age or other objects from flying forward, ing cords which are secured to the fastening

on the fastening rings.

Altea_EN.book Seite 18 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially

available.

Fastening rings*

There can be four fastening rings in the luggage compart-

ment for fastening luggage and other objects.

Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage

and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the

luggage compartment on page 17.

Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.

During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so

much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic

energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object. The

most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During

a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-

sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the

object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries

which might be sustained if this object strikes an occupant as it flies through

the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be further

increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING

If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could be sustained in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.

To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate retain rings.

Never secure a child seat

WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 19

Safety Fir Technical Data

ts, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is

oint seat belt.

vailable seats must never be transported in your

the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- stem.

amp*

cts as a reminder to the driver to fasten

hicle:

elt securely.

ngers to fasten their seat belts properly before

y using a child seat according to the child's

t.

Altea_EN.book Seite 19 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seat belts

Brief introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!

In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,

how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in

this chapter.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.

Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five sea

equipped with a three-p

WARNING

More people than a vehicle.

Every passenger in belt belonging to his or priate child restraint sy

Seat belt warning l

The warning lamp a

the seat belt.

Before starting the ve

Fasten your seat b

Instruct your passe

driving off.

Protect children b

height and weigh

Seat belts20

Altea_EN.book Seite 20 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

After the ignition has been switched on, the warning lamp on the instru-

ment panel lights up1) if the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and an

acoustic signal is heard if the vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h.

The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while

the ignition is switched on.

1) Depending on the model version

Seat belts 21

Safety Fir Technical Data

aws of physics work in the case of a head-on

rts moving fig. 7, a certain amount of energy

produced in the vehicle and its occupants.

y depends on the speed of the vehicle and the

passengers. The higher the speed and the

energy there is to be released in an accident.

owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed

km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-

ur example are not restrained by seat belts, all

ergy has to be absorbed at the point of impact

50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-

nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a

ve forward at the same speed their vehicle was

Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Altea_EN.book Seite 21 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Why wear seat belts?

Physical principles of frontal collisions

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic

energy must be absorbed.

It is easy to explain how the l

collision: When a vehicle sta

known as kinetic energy is

The amount of kinetic energ

weight of the vehicle and its

greater the weight, the more

The most significant factor, h

doubles from 25 km/h to 50

plied by four.

Because the passengers in o

of the passengers' kinetic en

fig. 8.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h to

sion can easily exceed one to

even higher.

Passengers not wearing seat

frontal collision, they will mo

Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Seat belts22

acting on the body in a collision are so great

oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,

wn forward and will make violent contact with

l, windscreen or whatever else is in the way

stitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags

tion. All passengers (including the driver) must

g the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe

dent regardless of whether an airbag is fitted

ered only once. To achieve the best possible

always be worn properly so that you will be

h no airbag is deployed.

passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they

ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers

anger not only themselves but also the front

Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.

Altea_EN.book Seite 22 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-

dents, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

The general belief that the passengers can protect them-

selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.

Even at low speeds the forces

that it is not possible to brace

unbelted passengers are thro

the steering wheel, dash pane

fig. 9.

The airbag system is not a sub

provide only additional protec

wear seat belts properly durin

injuries in the event of an acci

for the seat or not.

Note that airbags can be trigg

protection, the seat belt must

protected in accidents in whic

It is also important for the rear

could otherwise be thrown for

who do not use seat belts end

occupants fig. 10.

Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Seat belts 23

Safety Fir Technical Data

n seat belts before every trip, even when "just

wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics

t belts is an effective means of substantially

d improving the chances of survival in a serious

rly worn seat belts improve the protection

ent of an accident. For this reason, wearing a

most countries.

pped with airbags, the seat belts must be

airbags, for example, are only triggered in some

irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal

ns, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the

e in the control unit is not exceeded.

wear your seat belt and ensure that your

eir seat belts properly before you drive off!

using seat belts

rrectly, they can reduce the risk of

elt as described in this section.

lts can be fastened at all times and are not

incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only

Altea_EN.book Seite 23 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seat belt protection

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the

event of an accident.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-

tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.

Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to

severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of

being thrown from the car.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability

of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other

passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to

absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these

features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of

injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts

substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is

why it is so important to faste

driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers

have shown that wearing sea

reducing the risk of injury an

accident. Furthermore, prope

provided by airbags in the ev

seat belt is required by law in

Although your vehicle is equi

fastened and worn. The front

frontal accidents. The front a

collisions, minor side collisio

airbag trigger threshold valu

Therefore, you should always

passengers have fastened th

Safety instructions on

If seat belts are used co

injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat b

Ensure that the seat be

damaged.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.

Fig. 11 A driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Seat belts24

damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ean, otherwise the retractors may not work

nt and rear occupants are locked into

its full protection if the seat belt is not

Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

Altea_EN.book Seite 24 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear seat belts, otherwise they may be in danger of injury!

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not posi- tioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod

The belts must be kept cl properly page 218.

Seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

The seat belts for the fro

position by a latch.

The seat belt cannot offer

positioned correctly.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 25

Safety Fir Technical Data

ximum protection only when they are

Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 14 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

Altea_EN.book Seite 25 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly

across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and

push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click

page 24, fig. 12.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in

the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder

strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled

slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends

and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt

tensioners page 28.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause extremely severe injuries.

Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 46.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their ma

properly positioned.

Seat belts26

lso fasten their seat belts properly

he unborn child is for the mother to

rly at all times during the pregnancy.

imum protection only when the seat belt

age 25.

d head restraint correctly page 10.

pull the belt evenly across your chest and

the pelvis fig. 15.

to the buckle for the corresponding seat

it is securely locked with an audible click

hat the latch plate is securely engaged in

Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

Altea_EN.book Seite 26 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder

region:

belt height adjustment for the front seats.

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 25, fig. 13.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 23.

Pregnant women must a

The best protection for t

wear the seat belt prope

The seat belt provides max

is properly positioned p

Adjust the front seat an

Holding the latch plate,

as low as possible over

Insert the latch plate in

and push it down until

.

Pull the belt to ensure t

the buckle.

Seat belts 27

Safety Fir Technical Data

hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim

hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.

height

ers can be used to adjust the position

houlder.

the front seats can be used to adjust the

shoulder.

Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster

Altea_EN.book Seite 27 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 23.

Seat belt release

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has

come to a standstill.

Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate

is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by

is not damaged.

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belt height adjust

of the seat belt at the s

The seat belt adjuster for

proper belt position at the

Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle

Seat belts28

information and warnings concerning the use

rs

t tensioner

, the seat belts on the front seats are

upants are equipped with belt tensioners.

nsioners during severe head-on, lateral and

elt is being worn. This retracts and tightens the

rd motion of the occupants.

triggered only once.

ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,

hicle overturns or in situations where no large

rear of the vehicle.

are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is

ion of fire in the vehicle.

ments must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with

pleased to pass on the information to you.

Altea_EN.book Seite 28 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this

position page 27, fig. 17.

Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted

the seat belt page 25.

After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the

catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal

injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is

properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order

described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs

substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe

or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially

increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has

assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are respon-

sible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:

Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the

vehicle is moving .

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.

Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them for the whole journey.

Read and always observe of seat belts page 23.

Seat belt tensione

Function of the seat bel

During a frontal collision

retracted automatically.

The seat belts for the front occ

Sensors will trigger the belt te

rear collisions only if the seat b

seat belts, reducing the forwa

The seat belt tensioner can be

The seat belt tensioners will n

side or rear collision, if the ve

forces act on the front, side or

Note If the seat belt tensioners

normal and it is not an indicat

The relevant safety require

components of the system are

these regulations and will be

WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 29

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 29 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Service and disposal of belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the

seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install

parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be

damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt

tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that

removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-

tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tensioners are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts.

The seat belt tensioner and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.

The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.

Airbag system30

critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This

possible distance between yourself and the

t airbags can completely deploy when trig-

m protection.

at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-

d the speed of the vehicle.

red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-

ollision and detected by the control unit. If the

during the collision and measured by the

specified reference values, the front, side

be triggered. Take into account that the visible

in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an

gs had been triggered.

orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.

hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. You should always years of age on the rear seat. Never transport are not restrained or the restraint system is

, size or weight.

at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.

y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .

Altea_EN.book Seite 30 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the

seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting

position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure

the following before driving:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.

Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly

page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.

Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your

vehicle page 46.

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an

incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause

you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle

assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat

belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,

the inflating airbag may inflict

also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest

front airbag. This way, the fron

gered, providing their maximu

The most important factors th

dent, the angle of collision an

Whether the airbags are trigge

ation rate resulting from the c

vehicle deceleration occurring

control unit remains below the

and/or curtain airbag will not

damage in a vehicle involved

indication as to why the airba

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat

All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie transport all children up to 12 children in the vehicle if they not appropriate for their age

If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by

To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 19

Airbag system 31

Safety Fir Technical Data

ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.

tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:

enger airbag page 44, Deactivating

e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.

instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.

ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.

prevent the front passenger seat from being .

nt passenger seat must be in an upright

g and seat belt tensioner

itors the airbag and seat belt

ll airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehicle,

iring connections.

Altea_EN.book Seite 31 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Always properly adjust the front seats.

The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front

passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major

danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if

he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport

all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating

airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may

result.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.

That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front

passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.

When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size

of each child page 46.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,

an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a

If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi

Disable the front pass airbags*.

The child seat must b use on a front passenger

Follow the installation turer and observe the sa

Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb

Ensure that no objects pushed completely back

The backrest of the fro position.

Warning lamp for airba

This warning lamp mon

tensioner system.

The warning lamp monitors a

including control units and w

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Airbag system32

nd disposal of airbags

are installed in various places in your vehicle.

rbag system or remove and fit parts of the

r repair work, parts of the airbag system may be

ay be that, in the event of an accident, the

oes not inflate at all.

nts must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. The specialist workshops and the

miliar with these requirements.

ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.

hing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dash panel, y them in any way.

ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.

el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ining solvents. Solvents cause the surface to triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could

djust, remove or install parts of the airbag

stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the

ation and qualified personnel.

Altea_EN.book Seite 32 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system

Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly monitored

electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp

lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel* shows

AIRBAG / TENSIONER.

The system must be checked when the warning lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on,

after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the car is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In

addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the

display of the instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic

signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the

system immediately.

If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the

indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off

if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.

Repairs, maintenance a

The parts of the airbag system

If work is carried out on the ai

system when performing othe

damaged. The consequence m

airbag inflates incorrectly or d

The relevant safety requireme

components of the airbag are

Vehicle disposal centres are fa

WARNING

If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate

Do not cover or stick anyt plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modif

It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf

To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleansers conta become porous. If the airbag cause substantial injuries.

Never attempt to repair, a system.

Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform

Airbag system 33

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 33 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

We strongly recommend you to go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system34

is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and

ger is located in the dash panel fig. 19.

ord AIRBAG.

elts, the front airbag system gives the front

on for the head and chest in the event of a

e 37, Safety notes on the front airbag system.

ction of restraining the occupants, the seat

ront passenger in a position where the airbags

ion in a frontal collision.

stitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

e seat belts at all times, not only because this

ntries, but also for your safety page 19,

bag system are:

onitoring system (control unit),

ag with gas generator) for the driver and front

nstrument panel page 31.

s monitored electronically. The airbag warning

onds every time the ignition is switched on

if the warning lamp :

ignition is switched on page 31

ed on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

up again after the ignition is switched on,

he car is moving.

Altea_EN.book Seite 34 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front airbag for the driver

the airbag for the front passen

Airbags are identified by the w

In conjunction with the seat b

occupants additional protecti

severe frontal collision pag

In addition to their normal fun

belts also hold the driver and f

can provide maximum protect

The airbag system is not a sub

of the vehicle's overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts correctly and have a

it is most important to wear th

is required by law in most cou

Brief introduction.

The main parts of the front air

an electronic control and m

the two front airbags (airb

passenger,

a warning lamp in the i

The airbag system operation i

lamp will light up for a few sec

(self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system

does not light up when the

after the ignition is switch

it turns off and then lights

lights up or flashes while t

Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel

Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

Airbag system 35

Safety Fir Technical Data

ags

the risk of head or chest injury.

d so that the airbags for the driver and front

severe frontal collision.

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and

d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed

movement of the front occupants and help to

e head and the upper part of the body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag. After the collision, the

r the front occupants to see forward.

d extra protection in an accident, the airbags

idly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags

Altea_EN.book Seite 35 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor frontal collision,

there is a side collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of front airb

Inflated airbags reduce

The airbag system is designe

passenger are triggered in a

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered

deploy in front of the driver an

airbags cushion the forward

reduce the risk of injury to th

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

airbag deflates sufficiently fo

In order to provide the desire

have to deploy extremely rap

Airbag system36

. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags triggered

Altea_EN.book Seite 36 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver

and front passenger airbags are triggered fig. 21. The airbag covers

remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

Fig are

Airbag system 37

Safety Fir Technical Data

ags

t a substitute for the seat belts.

ated in the driver seat and front passenger seat

side airbags are located in the rear wheel

are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper

n the rear wheel housing lining.

the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-

or the upper body in the event of a severe side

notes on the operation of the side airbag

rbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on

the body facing the impact. In addition to their

the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also

Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat

Altea_EN.book Seite 37 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety notes on the front airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Description of side airb

The airbag system is no

The front side airbags are loc

backrests fig. 22. The rear

housing lining. The locations

region of the backrests and i

Together with the seat belts,

pants additional protection f

collision page 40, Safety

system.

In a side collision, the side ai

the front seats to the areas of

normal function of protecting

Airbag system38

door panels have been removed or if the ly fitted.

the loudspeakers in the door panels have les left by the loudspeakers have been

enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers in the interior door panels.

e doors should be made in a qualified author-

s can only provide maximum protection if the ly page 10, Proper sitting position for

he airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, r, or not trigger correctly.

Altea_EN.book Seite 38 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

hold the passengers in the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position

where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,

not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your

safety page 19, Brief introduction.

The side airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor side collision,

there is a frontal collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

The main parts of the airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),

The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side

airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing.

a warning lamp in the instrument panel page 31.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on

(self-diagnosis).

WARNING

In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.

Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.

Never drive if the interior panels have not been correct

Never drive the vehicle if been removed, unless the ho correctly closed.

Always check that the op or other equipment are fitted

Any work carried out to th ised workshop.

The seat belts and airbag occupants are seated correct occupants.

If a fault has occurred in t immediately by a qualified w the system may fail to trigge

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 39

Safety Fir Technical Data

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

Altea_EN.book Seite 39 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Operation of side airbags

Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

many side impact collisions.

In some side collisions, the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the

vehicle fig. 23.

In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the

front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the

upper body.

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle

Airbag system40

incorrect sitting position, they expose them- injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.

ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may m operation.

components of the airbag system in any way.

s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag

ly. All work carried out on the front door must hop.

Altea_EN.book Seite 40 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in side impact collisions.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the back- rest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 219, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

When children assume an selves to an increased risk of particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio

Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by occur during the airbag syste

Do not attempt to modify

The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a qualified works

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 41

Safety Fir Technical Data

untries, but also for your safety page 19,

airbag system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

gs with gas generator) for the driver, front

n the rear seats,

instrument panel page 31.

is monitored electronically.

ll not be triggered

ff,

g. 24 Location of head airbags on the left side of the hicle

Altea_EN.book Seite 41 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors

fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-

pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a

severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the

curtain airbag system.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this

is required by law in most co

Brief introduction.

The main parts of the curtain

an electronic control and

the curtain airbags (airba

passenger and passengers o

a warning lamp in the

The airbag system operation

The curtain airbag system wi

the ignition is switched o

Fi ve

Airbag system42

e curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side

e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-

the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the

vers the side windows and door pillars.

extra protection in an accident, the airbags

ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

hion the movement of the front occupants and

y to the upper body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

ration of the curtain airbag system

tly, they can considerably reduce the

ds of accident.

gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

rtain airbag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.

Altea_EN.book Seite 42 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

there is a frontal collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

if the vehicle rolls,

during a minor side collision,

WARNING

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

a side collision.

During some side collisions th

of the vehicle fig. 25.

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

process, the curtain airbag co

In order to provide the desired

have to deploy extremely rapid

may develop when the airbag

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cus

help to reduce the risk of injur

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

Safety notes on the ope

If you use airbags correc

risk of injury in many kin

WARNING

In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the cu vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to

Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags

Airbag system 43

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 43 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 219, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system44

g is deactivated, this means that only the

d. All the other airbags in the vehicle

airbag

in the key operated switch in the glove

sition OFF fig. 26.

lamp OFF on the instrument panel

en the ignition is switched on .

irbag

the key-operated switch in the glove

sition ON fig. 26.

Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console

Altea_EN.book Seite 44 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Deactivating airbags*

Front passenger airbag deactivation

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,

the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.

When the passenger airba

frontal airbag is deactivate

remain functional.

Disabling front passenger

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition switch

compartment to the po

Check that the warning

fig. 27 remains lit wh

Enabling front passenger a

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition key in

compartment to the po

Fig. 26 In the glove compartment: key for enabling and disabling front passenger airbag

Airbag system 45

Safety Fir Technical Data

er the front passenger airbag will deploy all your passengers of this.

key to activate / deactivate the passenger front ront airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.

Altea_EN.book Seite 45 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does

page 44, fig. 27 not light up when the ignition is switched on

.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should only deactivate the front passenger airbag when, in excep- tional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 46, Child safety.

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.

Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.

When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.

Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.

It is predictable wheth during an accident! Warn

When using the ignition airbag, only the passenger f side airbag and head airbag

WARNING (continued)

Child safety46

the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

oard documentation.

Altea_EN.book Seite 46 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear

seat than on the front passenger seat.

For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age are

transported on the rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a

child restraint system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age,

height and weight. For safety reasons, the child seat should be installed in

the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to

children. page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do

not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-

dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-

sories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke2).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with

the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note

page 47, Safety notes on using child seats.

We recommend you to include

manual together with the on-b

2) Not for all countries

Child safety 47

Safety Fir Technical Data

bies on your lap, this can result in potentially

transported in a vehicle without being properly eel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,

ugh the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries er passengers.

proper sitting position when the car is moving, greater risk of injury in the event of sudden accident. This is particularly important if the t passenger seat and the airbag system is trig- could cause serious injury or even death.

protect your child!

ised child alone on a child seat or in the

nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold be fatal.

an 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat this could cause injuries to the abdominal and braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

lt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on

lts can cause injuries even in a minor collision uvres.

aximum protection only when the seat belt is 24, Seat belts.

py a child seat page 48, Child seats.

Altea_EN.book Seite 47 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety notes on using child seats

Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of

injury in an accident!

As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in

your vehicle.

Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats

page 48.

Always ensure that the seat belt is properly positioned according

to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child

seat.

When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.

Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least

every two hours.

WARNING

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 44, Deactivating airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or ba fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be secured, or to stand up or kn the child could be flung thro to themselves and to the oth

If children assume an im they expose themselves to braking manoeuvre or in an child is travelling on the fron gered in an accident; as this

A suitable child seat can

Never leave an unsuperv vehicle.

Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can

Children who are less th belt without a child seat, as neck areas during a sudden

Do not allow the seat be any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat be or in sudden braking manoe

The seat belt provides m properly positioned page

Only one child may occu

WARNING (continued)

Child safety48

ats

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

child.

t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration fig. 28.

ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration.

ructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

oard documentation.

ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 47.

Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Altea_EN.book Seite 48 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable

for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic

Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: children up to 10 kg

Group 0+: children up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard

bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number

below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child se

A suitable child seat and

help you to protect your

Group 0: For babies from abou

suitable seats are those appe

Group 0+: For babies from abo

suitable seats are those appe

Follow the manufacturer's inst

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to include

manual together with the on-b

WARNING

Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety

Child safety 49

Safety Fir Technical Data

ats

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

r child.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

e the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

board documentation.

weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best

ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.

eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5

by seat cushions with head restraints together

fig. 30.

Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.

Altea_EN.book Seite 49 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can

help you to protect your child.

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the

rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing

between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to include the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

manual together with the on-board documentation.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

Group 2 and 3 child se

A suitable child seat an

help you to protect you

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to includ

manual together with the on-

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age

protected by group 2 child se

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age w

metres tall are best protected

with properly worn seat belts

Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Child safety50

Altea_EN.book Seite 50 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

Child safety 51

Safety Fir Technical Data

n must be secured in the vehicle with a age, weight and size.

facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front ont passenger airbag has been disabled. This

the child! However, if, in exceptional cases, it hild in the front passenger seat, the front

4, Deactivating airbags* must always be ted to its highest position, where possible.

information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 47.

ith the ISOFIX system

red quickly, easily and safely on the

e ISOFIX system.

Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings

Altea_EN.book Seite 51 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Securing child seats

Ways to secure a child seat

A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on

the front passenger seat.

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the

following ways:

Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.

Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be

secured without fastening seat belts, using the ISOFIX and page 51

securing rings.

U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age

category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult

seat belt).

*: Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as

possible and always deactivate the airbag.

L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.

WARNING

When travelling, childre restraint system suitable for

Never install a child seat passenger seat unless the fr could cause fatal injuries to is necessary to transport a c passenger airbag page 4 disabled and the seat adjus

Read and always observe of child seats in Safe

Securing a child seat w

Child seats can be secu

rear outer seats with th

Category Weight

Seat locations

Front passenger

Rear outer Rear centre

Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U

Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U

Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U

Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U

Child safety52

Altea_EN.book Seite 52 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the

manufacturer's instructions.

Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.

Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the

child seat can be heard to engage securely.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the

rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear

floor. The access to the ISOFIX rings is between the rear seat backrest and

the seat cushioning.

Child seats with ISOFIX mountings are available in your Authorised Service

Centres.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed to only be used with ISOFIX child seats.

Never secure child seats without the ISOFIX system, retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child.

Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly to the ISOFIX anchor points.

53

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 53 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

54

Fig. 3

Altea_EN.book Seite 54 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

2 Dash panel

Cockpit 55

Safety Fir Technical Data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tivated front passenger airbag . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

console:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lectric socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

witch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ol lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

e bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

closing the front windows . . . . . . . .

157

161

137

44

30

140

178

144

95

195

82

185

148

131

174

183

119

169

167

227

109

Altea_EN.book Seite 55 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Operating instructions

Cockpit

Overview

Overview of the dash panel

This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the

controls and displays.

Door release lever

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . .

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air vent

Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system*

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel:

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ Driver front airbag

Windscreen wiper and washer lever and operation of the

multifunction display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls for

Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climatic* . . . . . . . .

Climatronic* . . . .

Radio/Navigator*

Right seat heating but

Warning lamp for deac

Front passenger airbag

Glove compartment lev

Gear shift lever . . . . .

Cup holder compartme

Controls on the centre

Central locking . .

ESP . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre pressure contro

Park Pilot* . . . . . .

Cigarette lighter / E

Exterior mirror adjus

Start-Stop* . . . . . .

Handbrake . . . . . . . .

Hazard warning light s

Pedals

Ignition lock . . . . . . .

Steering column contr

Handle for releasing th

Button for opening and

A1

A2 114

A3 118

A4 118

A5

A6 121, 188

A7 87

A8

57

61

77

A9 30

A10

126, 63

A11 137

A12

155

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

A25

A26

A27

Cockpit56

Altea_EN.book Seite 56 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . .

Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain

models/model years or are optional extras.

A28 109

A29 109

Cockpit 57

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 33 Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument nel

Altea_EN.book Seite 57 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Instruments

Instrument overview

The instruments display the vehicle operating status.

Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument panel

Fuel gauge page 58

Multi-function display page 61

Engine coolant temperature gauge page 58

Rev counter page 59

Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 59

Speedometer page 59

Fi pa

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Cockpit58

ture gauge

ngine coolant temperature.

heavy engine loads fig. 35.

the needle should be in the middle section of

y also rise when the engine is working hard,

peratures. This is no cause for concern as long

light up and no warning message* appears on

, fig. 49 will light up if the needle is in the

arning message appears on the instrument

Fig. 35 Instrument panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge

A2

Altea_EN.book Seite 58 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Fuel gauge and reserve indicator

Instrument panel: fuel gauge

The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.

When the needle reaches the reserve area fig. 34 (arrow), the warning

lamp will light up and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.

The following text appears on the instrument panel display 3) PLEASE REFUEL [XXX]*

Engine coolant tempera

This gauge shows the e

Needle in cold zone

Avoid high engine speeds and

Needle in normal zone

In normal driving conditions,

the scale. The temperature ma

especially at high outside tem

as the warning lamp does not

the instrument panel display.

Needle in warning zone

The warning lamp* page 77

warning zone. The following w

3) Depending on the version of the model.

Fig. 34 Instrument panel: fuel gauge

AA

AB

AC

Cockpit 59

Safety Fir Technical Data

nvironment rs early will help you to save fuel and minimise

d with a digital odometer and a trip recorder, in

s display.

the instructions shown on page 201 should

k*

ted in the instrument panel display.

page 57, fig. 33 clockwise until the

our. The hour will flash. To change the

.

lockwise to the second click to set the

ill flash. To change the minutes, press the

A5

Altea_EN.book Seite 59 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

panel display 4). Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant

level page 234 .

Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain

technical assistance.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn- ings page 227.

Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At

high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the

engine overheating.

Rev counter

The rev counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per

minute.

The start of the red zone page 57, fig. 33 indicates the maximum

engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to

change up a into a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot

off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.

Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of

engine damage.

For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gea

engine noise.

Speedometer

The speedometer is equippe

addition to a service interval

During the running-in period,

be followed.

Setting the digital cloc

The digital clock is loca

Turn the setting knob first click to set the h

hour, press the button

Turn the setting knob c

minutes. The minutes w

button.

4) Depending on the version of the model.

A4

Cockpit60

den acoustic signal is heard, lamp lights

, this means that there is a fault in the LPG

stic signal, press the switch . Take the

hop to check the LPG system.

inflammable substance. It may cause severe

avoid any risk of fire or explosion.

in a closed area (for example in a garage), ate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, vent of a leak.

. 36 Centre console: gas system control warning ts and switch.

A2

GAS A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 60 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

LPG system*

LPG gauge

LPG system filler level display

The LPG tank in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres at an

outside temperature of 15C page 222, Refuelling with LPG.

The level of LPG in the tank is shown by the five control lights fig. 36

and . It varies with the outside temperatures.

When the LPG tank is full, the blue lights come on and as the level goes

down the blue lights go out. When the level reaches the reserve, the lamp

comes on.

When the LPG tank is empty, a long warning signal is heard. Warning lamp

comes on and warning lamps flash slowly. To switch off the acoustic

signal, press the switch . Refill with LPG at the earliest opportunity.

If while driving with LPG, a sud

up and lamps flash quickly

system. To switch off the acou

vehicle to a specialised works

WARNING

LPG is a highly explosive and burns and other injury.

Due care must be taken to

When parking the vehicle make sure that there is adequ to neutralise the LPG in the e

Fig ligh

AA

AB

AA

AB

A2

AA

GAS A1

AA

Cockpit 61

Safety Fir Technical Data

t panel display

ng or information texts)

ument panel shows, amongst other

trip recorder as well as the selector

age 59. On the right of the display: Selector

the automatic gearbox*. The current position of

gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)* is high-

vice interval display*.

Fig. 37 Detailed view of the instrument panel: screen with different indi- cators

Altea_EN.book Seite 61 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note The values shown in the average fuel consumption and the fuel remaining

displays on the multifunction display (MFI)5) on the instrument panel are

approximate value only.

Please check the fuel level on the petrol tank fuel level indicator on the

instrument panel page 58

If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temper-

ature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on LPG.

Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.

Digital instrumen

Display (without warni

The display in the instr

things, the mileage and

lever position.

Digital clock display p

lever position display for

the selector lever or the

lighted.

Outside temperature.

Odometer or flexible ser

5) Optional equipment

A1

A2

A3

Cockpit62

play*

ve fuel.

el. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot

display. If you are not in the correct gear, an

ear display indicating whether you should

erval Display

isplay registers the total amount of distance

rs the short journeys. The last digit indicates

ecorder counter may be reset by holding down

ig. 33 for a few seconds.

Fig. 39 Gear display

A6

Altea_EN.book Seite 62 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Displayed categories*

The display on the instrument panel shows the mileage and

trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.

Clock: Setting the time. On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-

tion display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of the

selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is highlighted.

There are optional and automatic displays in this field.

Optional indicators: e.g. those on the multifunction display (MFI)

Automatic indicators: Information and warning messages.

Menus providing further information and which can be used to make

diverse settings are also shown: Instrument panel menus

Outside temperature.

Odometer or flexible service interval display.

Recommended gear dis

This display helps to sa

Use the gear display to save fu

will be shown next to the gear

arrow will appear next to the g

change up or down.

Odometer or Service Int

Odometer

The left-hand counter in the d

covered by the vehicle.

The right-hand counter registe

steps of 100 metres. The trip r

the reset button page 57, f

Fig. 38 Digital instru- ment panel display

A1

A2

A3

A4

Cockpit 63

Safety Fir Technical Data

tion display (MFI)*

ay (MFI) shows you information on the

mption.

Fig. 40 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 41 Digital instru- ment panel display

Altea_EN.book Seite 63 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Service interval display

A Service pre-warning will appear in the odometer if a service is due soon. A

spanner symbol appears and the display km with the distance that can

be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will change

after approximately 10 seconds. A clock symbol appears and the number

of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The following

message is shown in the instrument panel display*: SERV. IN ... KM OR ... DAYS. The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after

the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can

be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip recorder or by pressing

the rocker switch of the MFI fig. 40 .

With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by

pressing the trip recorder reset knob for 2 seconds.

An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day

information.

Display with multifunc

The multifunction displ

journey and fuel consu

AB

Cockpit64

ction display (MFI)*

llowing displays in the multifunction display

ch fig. 42 on the windscreen wiper lever.

Fig. 42 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 43 Digital instru- ment panel display: average fuel consumption indicator.

AB

Altea_EN.book Seite 64 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The multifunction system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown

in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

Selecting a memory

When the ignition is on, briefly press button page 63, fig. 40

on the windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to

another or press button on the steering wheel controls

page 63, fig. 40.

Resetting a memory

Select the memory that you would like to reset.

Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or button

on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.

The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the

moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is

continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will

be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically

be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.

The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-

neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a

total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance travelled.

The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is

reached.

Displays in the multifun

You can switch between the fo

(MFI) by operating rocker swit

AA

AA

AA AA

Cockpit 65

Safety Fir Technical Data

sing the figures for tank content and current fuel

ar the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

nsumption

n will be shown page 64, fig. 43 after a

0 metres has been travelled. Until then dashes

display will be updated every 5 seconds while

amount of fuel used will not be shown.

l consumption

rent fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the

hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position

e how your driving style affects fuel consump-

nds from -45C to +58C. At temperatures below

is displayed and a warning sounds if the

n 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will flash

ains lit until the outside temperature rises

ready lit.

speed, enter the speed indicator mode and

the display remembers the indicated speed. If

ded, a warning message is displayed on the

l sounds.

ressing the button (Reset).

ion, the message on the screen may vary and may be

speed indication or by a speed message.

AA

Altea_EN.book Seite 65 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Memory displays

Driving speed

Journey duration

Average speed

Distance

Distance to empty

Average fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption

Outside temperature display

Speed warning

km/h - Driving speed

Driving speed is digitally shown in the display.

min - Journey duration

The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition

was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.

The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

km/h - Average speed

The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately

100 metres. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The display will be

updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

km - Distance travelled

The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will

automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

Km - Fuel range

The fuel range is calculated u

consumption. It shows how f

tions as a reference.

l/100 km - Average fuel co

The average fuel consumptio

distance of approximately 10

will appear in the display. The

the vehicle is in motion. The

l/100 km or l/h - Current fue

The display will show the cur

vehicle is in motion or in litre/

with the engine running.

Using this display you can se

tion page 203.

Outside temperature display

The measurement range exte

+4C, an ice crystal symbol

vehicle is moving at more tha

for about 10 seconds and rem

above +4C or 6C if it was al

Set speed indicator

When driving at the required

press the button (Reset),

the indicated speed is excee

screen6) and a warning signa

This may be deactivated by p

6) Depending on the model vers

represented by flashing of the

AA

Cockpit66

warning or information texts, faults are indi-

ng lamps.

y 1 (red)

he warning lamp will flash or light up and will

ible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop

ne. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-

.

etected at the same time, the symbols will be

or about 2 seconds at a time and will continue

display for the duration of a priority 1 warning

g messages (red)

ith the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID AKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.

e warning message STOP SEE COOLANT

l with the warning message STOP ENGINE TION MANUAL.

y 2 (yellow)

e warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied

nction should be checked as soon as possible.

Altea_EN.book Seite 66 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h

within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.

WARNING

There could be black ice on the road surface even if the snowflake symbol is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this display - Risk of accident!

Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-

ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature as

a result of the heat radiated from the engine.

Warning or information message in the display

Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and

warning/information reports.

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-

tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-

cated by symbols with warning or information messages in the display. An

warning buzzer is given in certain cases.

Warning symbols

There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols

(priority 2)

Information text

In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information

in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.

Note In the case of screens without

cated exclusively by the warni

Warning reports, Priorit

If one of these faults occurs, t

be accompanied by three aud the car and switch off the engi

sional assistance if necessary

If several priority 1 faults are d

displayed one after the other f

until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the

message.

Examples of priority 1 warnin

Brake system symbol w

SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BR

Coolant symbol with th

INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Engine oil pressure symbo

OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUC

Warning reports, Priorit

If one of these faults occurs, th

by one audible warning. The fu

AB

Cockpit 67

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 67 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the

symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After

a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown

as a reminder at the side of the display.

Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning

messages have been dealt with!

Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):7)

Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.

Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank

page 236.

7) Depending on the version of the model.

Cockpit68

ing will be used as an example of how to

ood idea if you are, for example, using

suited for the top speed of the vehicle.

th the MFI lever

or two seconds to return to main menu

y be necessary to repeat this operation

displayed.

uration with the MFI lever

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

also be a triangle on the right.

tion.

Fig. 45 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to change the menu

Altea_EN.book Seite 68 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Dash panel menus*

Example of menu use

All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according

to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus may

vary according to the version of the model.

The setting of a speed warn

use the menus. This is a g

winter tyres which are not

1. Open the main menu wi

Switch the ignition on.

Hold down button f

from other menu. It ma

until the main menu is

2. Open the menu Config

To choose an option fro

of the rocker switch. Th

two lines and there will

Select menu Configura

Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu

AB

Cockpit 69

Safety Fir Technical Data

uipment one or more of these menus will be

f menu displayed

ent set speed is displayed

s will be shown if the function is deactivated.

nction is activated or deactivated

value increases by 10 km/h

value decreases by 10 km/h

u Winter tyres is closed and the last dis-

enu is shown.

Altea_EN.book Seite 69 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.

2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls

To access the Configuration menu, press button

page 68, fig. 45 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in

this menu.

3. Open the main menu Winter tyres

Select option Winter tyres using switch .

Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.

4. Program a speed limit warning

Use button to select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10 km/h

and press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.

5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning

Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the

button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed

warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---

6. To close the menu Winter tyres

In the menu select Back.

The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the

vehicle reaches the set speed.

Example menu Winter tyres

Note For electronic and vehicle eq

displayed.

AA

AC

AB

AA

AB

AB

AB

On the display Winter tyres

Function Name o

X km/h The curr

or --- or dashe

On / Off If the fu

+10 km/h The set

-10 km/h The set

Back The men

played m

Cockpit70

t button for at least 2 seconds. It may

this operation until the main menu is

in menu

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

ct the entry.

68

Function

the multifunction display (MFI): Multifunc-

ay (MFI)

displays the available information for the

io source (radio station, CD audio track / MP3

od / Bluetooth audioa) / call informationa).

is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a

n system. The navigation system must be

on. When the route guidance is activated, the

rows and proximity bars are displayed. The

similar to that of the Navigation system.

e guidance is not activated, the direction of

pass) and the name of the street along

are driving are shown.

AB

Altea_EN.book Seite 70 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Main menu

The menu provides access to the different display functions

(only with the MFI lever).

Open main menu

Switch the ignition on.

Press and hold the ejec

be necessary to repeat

displayed.

Select a menu from the ma

To choose an option fro

of rocker switch . Th

two horizontal lines.

Press button to sele

Example of menu use page Fig. 46 Windscreen wiper lever (MFI): button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and rocker switch B to change the menu

Fig. 47 Digital instru- ment panel display: Main menu

Main menu

Multi-function display

Change to

tion displ

Audio This menu

active aud

/ USB / iP

Navigation This menu

navigatio

switched

turning ar

display is

If the rout

travel (com

which you

AB

AA

Cockpit 71

Safety Fir Technical Data

enu (MFI)

ay (MFI) shows you information on the

mption.

I) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip memory ected memory is shown on the upper right hand

48 at all times.

ay menu

display menu from the main menu page 70

on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-

ory to another, briefly press button

ge 68 on the windscreen wiper lever or the

ion lever page 68, fig. 45 page 68 while

n.

Fig. 48 Multifunction display (MFI) instrument panel display.

AA

OK

Altea_EN.book Seite 71 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be

displayed.

Multifunction display m

The multifunction displ

journey and fuel consu

The multifunction display (MF

and 2 - Total memory. The sel

section of the display fig.

Open the multifunction displ

Select the Multifunction and press the button

tion lever*.

Selecting a memory

To change from one mem

page 68, fig. 44 pa

button on the multifunct

the ignition is switched o

Telephone This menu is only available in vehicles with radio unit if

the vehicle is fitted with the telephone function. In vehi-

cles fitted with a radio navigation system, this menu is

available in the central unit (navigator) Booklet

SEAT Media System 2.1.

Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information

texts: Vehicle status menu

This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-

played.

Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when

using winter tyres, units, language, independent heat-

ing, the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience

menu to be reset.

a) Only in vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system.

OK

Cockpit72

displays are shown on the instrument panel

function Display Data from the Configuration

ted or deactivated individually by marking the

he button on the windscreen wiper lever or

eel*.

t of time which has elapsed since the ignition

both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.

be deleted once this value has been reached.

100 km or l/h

nt fuel consumption in litres/100 km whilst the

/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary posi-

how your driving style affects fuel consump-

km

will be shown after a distance of approximately

. Until then dashes will appear in the display.

ery 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

ot be shown.

ing the figures for tank content and current fuel

r the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

OK

Altea_EN.book Seite 72 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Resetting a memory

Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.

Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on

the multifunction* steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.

The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the

moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is

continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will

be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically

be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.

The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-

vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)

up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1,999 km distance trav-

elled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is

reached.

Memory indications

The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the

rocker switch page 68, fig. 44 page 68 on the windscreen wiper

lever or by pressing button or page 68, fig. 45 on the multifunction

steering wheel*.

Duration

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Distance to empty

Distance

Average speed

Auxiliary speed

Digital display of speed8)

Speed warning at --- km/h

Personal selection of display

The driver can establish which

display as required:

Select the submenu Multi menu page 74.

The displays can be activa

required option and pressing t

the multifunction steering wh

Duration in h and min

The display shows the amoun

was switched on.

The maximum display value in

The memory will automatically

Current fuel consumption in l/

The display will show the curre

vehicle is in motion or in litres

tion with the engine running.

Using this display you can see

tion page 167.

Average consumption in l/100

The average fuel consumption

100 metres has been travelled

The display will be updated ev

The amount of fuel used will n

Fuel range in km

The fuel range is calculated us

consumption. It shows how fa

tions as a reference.

8) It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.

AA OK

AB

Cockpit 73

Safety Fir Technical Data

ges from -40C (-40F) to +50C (+125F). At

+4C (+39.2F), a snowflake symbol (ice

to the outside temperature display. This symbol

remains lit until the outside temperature rises

e road surface even if the snowflake symbol you should not rely exclusively on this display

ent panels; therefore the multifunction display

nary or travelling at very low speeds, the

e slightly higher than the actual outside temper-

adiated from the engine.

ion steering wheel* do not have buttons on the

ultifunction display can only be controlled from

tion steering wheel*.

ing or information texts

enu

cle status from the main menu: Main

n on the windscreen wiper lever OK AA

Altea_EN.book Seite 73 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Distance travelled in km

The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will

automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

Average speed in km/h

The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100

metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The

display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

Alternative speed display (mph or km/h)

The speed is also displayed in a second unit of measurement other than that

used on the speedometer.

Select the menu Configuration using the rocker switch on the windscreen

wiper lever or the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel* page 68.

Select the option Auxiliary speed and press on the windscreen wiper

lever or the multifunction steering wheel*.

Digital display of speed

The instrument panel display gives the speed in digital format8).

Speed warning at --- km/h

This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the

button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*

to select the current speed. The instrument panel display gives the selected

speed, for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset

the speed between 30 km/h and 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons

or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait

five seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set

speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is

displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored

speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed warning --- km/h is now displayed on the instrument panel.

Outside temperature display

The measurement margin ran

outside temperatures below

warning) appears in addition

flashes for a few seconds and

above +6C (+42.8F).

WARNING

There could be black ice on th is not shown. For this reason - Risk of accident!

Note There are different instrum

may vary.

When the vehicle is statio

temperature displayed may b

ature as a result of the heat r

Vehicles with a multifunct

windscreen wiper lever. The m

the buttons on the multifunc

Vehicle status menu

This menu shows warn

Open Vehicle Condition m

Select the option Vehi menu and press butto

page 70, fig. 46. or

OK

OK

AA

AB

OK

OK

Cockpit74

Function

enu is used to establish the data in the multi-

on display menu to be displayed on the instru-

panel page 71

enu allows you to make the settings for the

nience functions in the vehicle.

this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle

g settings.

ours and minutes of the clock and the naviga-

ystem can be changed. Choose between 12 or

ur format and change to summer time.

enu allows the setting of a speed at which an

l and acoustic warning will be given by the

. You can use this function, for example, if

ve fitted winter tyres which are not suited for

p speed of your vehicle. Please see the sec-

Wheels and tyres.

isplay texts and the navigation system texts

seen in different languages.

ption allows you to select the units for dis-

g temperature, fuel consumption values and

ces.

strument panel also displays the speed in

er different unit of measurement (mph or

to that given on the speedometer.

Altea_EN.book Seite 74 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 68, fig. 45 until the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.

Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: Information and warning

messages on the screen will automatically disappear from the screen after a

time and will be stored in the Vehicle status menu.

The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no

warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.

If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.

Example of menu use page 68

Note If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.

Configuration menu

This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-

tions.

Open Configuration menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 68, fig. 44 on the wind-

screen wiper lever. or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Example of menu use page 68

OK AA

Displayed on the screen

Multifunction dis- play data.

This m

functi

ment

Convenience This m

conve

Lights and visibility From

lightin

Time The h

tion s

24-ho

Winter tyres The m

optica

system

you ha

the to

tion

Settings: Language The d

can be

Units This o

playin

distan

Aux. Speed The in

anoth

km/h)

Cockpit 75

Safety Fir Technical Data

venience from the main menu and press

indscreen wiper lever.

e 68

uipment one or more of these menus will be

Function

door: Individual unlocking activated.

. locking: the doors are automatically locked

the vehicle is travelling at more than approx

/h.

unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key is

ved from the ignition.

ing and closing electric windows: this deter-

s whether to open or close all the windows

the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open

ion can also be activated for the driver door

chronised adjustment is selected, when the

r side exterior mirror is adjusted, the passen-

xterior mirror is also moved.

anufacturer's predefined values for the func-

of this menu are restored.

returns to the Configuration menu

Altea_EN.book Seite 75 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be

displayed.

SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the

existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.

The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a

standstill.

Convenience menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-

ience settings.

Open menu Convenience

Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press

the button page 68, fig. 44 on the windscreen wiper

lever.

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Choose the option Con the button on the w

Example of menu use pag

Note For electronic and vehicle eq

displayed.

Inter Service Consult service messages and reset service interval

display here.

Factory settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-

tions of this menu are restored.

Backa) This returns to the main menu

a) Only if the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFI).

OK AA

Displayed on the screen

Open door One

Auto

when

15 km

Auto

remo

Elec. window control Open

mine

when

funct

only.

Exterior mirror adjust.

If syn

drive

ger e

Factory settings The m

tions

Back This

AA

Cockpit76

ipment one or more of these menus will be

Altea_EN.book Seite 76 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Lights and visibility menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting

settings.

Open Lights and visibility Menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 68 on the windscreen

wiper lever. or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press

button on the windscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use page 68

Note For electronic and vehicle equ

displayed.

Displayed on the screen

Function

Coming Home/ Leaving Home

This option permits the adjustment of the time dur-

ing which the headlights remain lit after the vehicle

is locked, and also permits the function to be con-

nected and disconnected

Indicator conf. The convenience turn signal function can be acti-

vated or deactivated here. With the convenience

mode activated, the turn signal will blink at least

three times when turned on.

Factory settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-

tions of this menu are restored.

Back This returns to the Configuration menu

OK AA

AA

Cockpit 77

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 49 Instrument panel control and warning lamps. me of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only certain models/model versions or are optional extras.

Altea_EN.book Seite 77 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Warning lamps

Overview of the warning lamps

The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.

Fi So on

Cockpit78

g lamps and warning messages can result in mage to your vehicle.

ive page 84

applied

fluid level or

e system

page 83

ressure page 84

rol system switched on page 84

ndicator page 84

lit: TCS off

page 85

page 86

page 168

anical steering page 84

emission control system page 85

Electronic Stability Pro-

P) or the TCS is working

lit: ESP or TCS faulty

page 85

page 86

page 168

ear lever lock (automatic page 86

mobiliser page 86

ning of warning and control lamps

Further information

Altea_EN.book Seite 78 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

Failure to observe warnin serious personal injury or da

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and

control lamps Further

information

Fuel level / reserve page 79

Coolant level / coolant temperature page 79

Rear fog light switched on page 80

Turn signals in operation page 80

Engine fault (petrol engine) page 80

Glow plug system for diesel engine page 80

Main beam switched on page 81

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine

particulate filter page 81

ABS system fault page 81

Windscreen washer fluid level page 82

Alternator fault page 82

Fasten seat belts! page 19

Tyre pressure page 82

Airbag or belt tensioner system fault or

airbag disabled

page 28

page 31

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A13

Bulb defect

Handbrake

or low brake

fault in brak

Engine oil p

Cruise cont

Door open i

OFF If remaining

Electromech

Fault in the

If flashing: gramme (ES

If it remains

Automatic g

gearbox)

SAFE Electronic im

Item Symbol Mea

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

Cockpit 79

Safety Fir Technical Data

rature

s up if the coolant temperature is too

vel is too low.

not go out again after a few seconds.

p or flashes while the vehicle is moving, and

ls are emitted.

olant level is too low or the coolant temperature

s the following message10): CHECK COOLANT ge 234.

erature gauge. The coolant temperature is too

warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, it for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.

he overheating may be caused by a malfunction

radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-

again after driving on for a short distance, stop gine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre

s the following message11): STOP CHECK UAL.

he model.

he model.

Altea_EN.book Seite 79 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to prevent danger to third parties.

The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 227.

Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without

warning or information messages in the display.

In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-

priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information

message will also appear on the screen.

Fuel level / reserve

This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is under

the reserve level.

It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an warning buzzer is given. It reminds you to fuel up the fuel tank as soon as possible

page 221.

The instrument panel displays the following message9): PLEASE REFUEL!.

Coolant level* / tempe

The warning lamp light

high or if the coolant le

There is a fault if:

The warning symbol does

The warning lamp lights u

three acoustic warning signa

This means that either the co

is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

The instrument panel display

INSTRUCTION MANUAL pa

First look at the coolant temp

high if the needle is over the

switch the engine off and wa

If the coolant level is correct, t

of the radiator fan. Check the

sary page 262.

If the warning lamp lights up

the vehicle and switch the en or a qualified workshop.

Coolant level too low

The instrument panel display

COOLANT INSTRUCTION MAN

9) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

10) Depending on the version of t 11) Depending on the version of t

Cockpit80

turn signals, please see page 121.

tors the engine management system

nic Power Control) lights up when the ignition

e lamp is working properly. It should go out

nic engine management system while you are

l light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

ine fault

up to show that the glow plugs are

there is an engine fault.

while the glow plugs are preheating. When the

gine should be started straight away.

e management system while you are driving,

. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service

d have the engine checked.

Altea_EN.book Seite 80 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal

range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .

WARNING

If your vehicle is immobilised for technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and place the warning triangle.

Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.

The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings page 227.

Rear fog light

This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . For

further information see page 114.

Turn signals

The indicator lamp flashes when the turn signals are in oper-

ation.

Depending on which turn signal is operating, either the left or right turn

signal lamp flashes. Both indicator lamps will flash at the same time when

the hazard warning lights are switched on.

If any of both turn signals fails, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice

faster than normal.

For further information on the

Engine management*

This warning lamp moni

for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electro

is switched on to show that th

once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electro

driving, this warning lamp wil

assistance.

Glow plug system / Eng

The warning lamp lights

preheating. It flashes if

Warning lamp is lit

The warning lamp lights up

warning lamp goes off, the en

Warning lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engin

the glow plug lamp will flash

Centre as soon as possible an

Cockpit 81

Safety Fir Technical Data

(ABS)*

rs the ABS.

light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

after the system has run through an automatic

s not light up when the ignition is switched on.

ot go out again after a few seconds.

p when the vehicle is moving.

d in the normal way, without the ABS function.

ualified workshop as soon as possible. For

S see the page 193.

e ESP* warning lamp will also light up.

ights up together with the brake warning lamp

ult in the ABS function, but also a possible fault

et, read and observe the warnings on e engine compartment.

p should light up together with the ABS ehicle immediately and check the brake fluid e 239, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has ark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. .

correct, the fault in the brake system may have he ABS system. This could cause the rear

Altea_EN.book Seite 81 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Main beam headlights

This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.

The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the

headlight flasher is operating.

For further information see page 121.

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter

If the warning lamp lights up you may help the filter clean itself by driving

in the appropriate manner.

To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S

gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately

2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When

cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.

If the indicator is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-

shop to repair the fault.

WARNING

Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal manoeuvres in surrounding traffic.

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Anti-lock brake system

A warning lamp monito

The indicator lamp should

switched on. It goes out again

test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The warning lamp doe

The warning lamp does n

The warning lamp lights u

The vehicle can still be brake

Please take the vehicle to a q

further information on the AB

If a fault occurs in the ABS, th

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp l

, this indicates not only a fa

in the brake system .

WARNING

Before opening the bonn page 227, Working in th

If the brake warning lam warning lamp , stop the v level in the reservoir pag dropped below the MIN m Obtain technical assistance

If the brake fluid level is been caused by a failure of t

Cockpit82

l system controls the tyre speed and

of each tyre.

wheel revolutions and with this information,

ing the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel

p lights up. The wheel diameter changes

t.

ged.

because of a load.

under more pressure (for example, driving with

.

now chains.

l is fitted.

n

Fig. 50 Centre console: tyre monitor system button

Altea_EN.book Seite 82 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Washer fluid

This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen

washer level is too low.

This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity

page 236

The following message is shown on the instrument panel display*12): REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.

Alternator

This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go

out when the engine has started running.

If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer

charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified

workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary

because this will drain the battery.

Tyre pressure

The tyre pressure contro

the frequency spectrum

The tyre monitor 13) compares

the diameter of each wheel us

changes, the tyre warning lam

when:

Tyre pressure is insufficien

The tyre structure is dama

The vehicle is unbalanced

The wheels of one axle are

a trailer or on extreme slopes)

The vehicle is fitted with s

The temporary spare whee

12) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

13) Depending on the model versio

Cockpit 83

Safety Fir Technical Data

rake

s up if the handbrake is applied, if the

o low or if there is a fault in the brake

up if

with the handbrake on, the following message

t panel display 14): HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an

low page 239.

s the following message14): STOP BRAKE FLUID

e system.

s the following message14): BRAKE SYSTEM L.

p together with the ABS system warning lamp.

et, read and observe the warnings on

p does not go out, or if it lights up when page 239, Brake fluid in the reservoir is p the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-

p lights up together with the ABS warning n of the ABS could be out of action. This could

he model.

Altea_EN.book Seite 83 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more

wheels, the button page 82, fig. 50 must be kept pressed while the igni-

tion is on until an acoustic signal is heard and the warning lamp goes out.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or

heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value

for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor

system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

The tyre pressure warning lamp lights up

If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by

the driver, the tyre control warning lamp lights up .

The tyre pressure warning lamp flashes

If the tyre pressure warning lamp flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the

nearest specialist workshop.

WARNING

When the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up, reduce speed immedi- ately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.

The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.

Under certain circumstances (for example, when driving in a sportslike manner, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre warning lamp may light up or function incorrectly.

Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after

turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.

Brake system* / handb

The warning lamp light

brake fluid level falls to

system.

This warning lamp lights

the handbrake is on.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h

will appear on the instrumen

warning buzzer is given.

the brake fluid level is too

The instrument panel display

INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

there is a fault in the brak

The instrument panel display

FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUA

This warning lamp can light u

WARNING

Before opening the bonn page 227.

If the brake warning lam driving, the brake fluid level too low. Risk of accident. Sto nical assistance.

If the brake warning lam lamp , the control functio

14) Depending on the version of t

Cockpit84

the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The

le speed. Obtain technical assistance.

s on when the cruise control system

when the cruise control system is switched on.

cruise control system, see page 188.

or tailgate*

s up if one of the doors or the tailgate

o off when all the doors are closed correctly.

he ignition is switched off. It should go off

ehicle is locked.

*

g, the level of steering assistance depends on

e steering angle.

t up for a few seconds when the ignition is

once the engine is started.

the indicator remains lit, even with the engine

ly goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.

Altea_EN.book Seite 84 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Bulb defect

The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-

rior lighting is defective.

The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting

(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.

The instrument panel displays the following message15): LEFT FULL BEAM FAULTY.

Engine oil pressure

This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is

too low.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too

low, add more engine oil page 230.

The instrument panel displays the following message16): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

If the symbol flashes although

engine must not even run at id

Cruise control system*

The warning lamp come

is switched on.

The warning lamp lights up

For further information on the

Indicator for open doors

This warning lamp light

is open.

The warning light should g

The system also works when t

approx. 15 seconds after the v

Power assisted steering

For vehicles with power steerin

the vehicle's speed and on th

The warning lamp should ligh

switched on. It should go out

If the battery is disconnected,

running. The warning light on

15) Depending on the version of the model. 16) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

Cockpit 85

Safety Fir Technical Data

gramme (ESP)* /

lamps for the electronic stability

p provides information concerning

provides information on the

when the ignition is switched on and should go

which is how long the function check lasts.

ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake

tic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer

following functions:

SP is activated when driving.

ly if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

ult should occur in the ABS because the ESP

the ABS.

hts up and stays on after the engine is started,

ol system has temporarily switched off the ESP.

activated by switching the ignition off and then

goes out, this means the system is fully func-

ormation about the disconnection status of the

disconnected after pressing the

OFF

OFF

OFF

Altea_EN.book Seite 85 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not

go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The warning lamp may

appear in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indi-

cates a minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, as

the steering assistance is not working; in this case you should not keep

driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance. The power steering

does not work if the battery is flat or if the engine is off (for example, for

towing). You should take into account that you will need considerably more

power than normal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is not working

correctly or at all.

For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function Recommended steering

manoeuvre is included. See page 195

Emission control system*

This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.

Warning lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce

speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the

engine checked.

The instrument panel displays the following message17): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

Warning lamp is lit:

If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the

exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to

the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.

The following message is shown in the instrument panel display: EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

Electronic Stability Pro

There are two warning

programme. The lam

the function and the

disconnection status

Both lamps come on together

out after approx. 2 seconds,

This programme includes the

assist system (BAS), automa

stability programme (TSP).

The warning lamp has the

It flashes when the TCS/E

It will light up continuous

It will also come on if a fa

operates in conjunction with

If the ESP warning lamp lig

this may mean that the contr

In this case the ESP can be re

on again. If the warning lamp

tional.

The lamp provides inf system:

It stays lit when the TCS is

switch.

17) Depending on the version of the model.

OFF

Cockpit86

e

ssed when this warning lamp lights up. This is

gearbox* gear lever is moved out of the posi-

Safe

es if an unauthorised key is used.

at deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

rted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be

as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition

the following message18): SAFE. The vehicle

page 170.

tarted if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine

icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

e model.

Altea_EN.book Seite 86 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Differential lock fault (EDL)*

EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*

A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please

take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-

mation on the EDL see page 196, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.

Traction control system (TCS)* /

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from

spinning when the vehicle is accelerating

There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and .

Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go

out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.

The warning lamp has the following function:

It flashes when the TCS is on, and the vehicle is moving.

If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will remain

lit. It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-

ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 193,

Brakes

The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the system:

It stays lit when the TCS is disconnected after pressing the TCS OFF switch.

By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched

off.

Operating the foot brak

The brake pedal must be depre

necessary when the automatic

tions P or N.

Electronic immobiliser*

This warning lamp flash

Inside the key there is a chip th

matically when the key is inse

activated again automatically

lock.

The instrument panel displays

cannot be used in that case

The engine can, however, be s

key is used.

Note A perfect operation of the veh

OFF

OFF

OFF

18) Depending on the version of th

Steering wheel controls 87

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 87 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel controls

General notes

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible

to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-

matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver.

There are two versions of the multifunction module:

Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering

wheel.

Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and

the telephone system from the steering wheel.

Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, Audio CD,

mp3 CD, iPod19)/USB19)/SD19)) and the Radio navigation system, in which

case they also control the Navigation system.

Version for automatic gearbox* page 181.

19) If fitted in the vehicle.

Steering wheel controls88

Fig. 52 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

AUX table on page 90

Volume up

Volume down

No function specified

No function specified

No function specified

Silence

Altea_EN.book Seite 88 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Audio system

Steering wheel audio version controls

Fig. 51 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod*

Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward

Search for last station Last track

Hold down: Rewind

No function specified No function specified

Silence Pause

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls 89

Safety Fir Technical Data

Operates on instrument panel display

No function specifiedb)

Operates on instrument panel display

No function specifiedb)

No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel

No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel

Change source

Operates on instrument panel

Altea_EN.book Seite 89 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

a) Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display

Next preset b) Next track b)

a) Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display

Previous preset b) Previous track b)

a) Next preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

a) Previous preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

a) Change source Change source

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

a) Depending on the model version b) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls90

Fig. 54 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

TELEPHONE

up Volume up

own Volume down

pecified No function specified

pecified No function specified

ne menu on

t panel

Make call

Accept incoming call

End call

Hold down: reject incoming

call

ecognition Enable voice recognition

Altea_EN.book Seite 90 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls

Fig. 53 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX

Volume up Volume up Volume

Volume down Volume down Volume d

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function s

Search for last station Last track

Hold down: Rewind No function s

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telepho

instrumen

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice r

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls 91

Safety Fir Technical Data

specified

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

specified

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

n instrument

el

Change menu on instrument

panel

n instrument

el

Change menu on instrument

panel

trument panel Confirm

trument panel Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-

PLAY menu

Altea_EN.book Seite 91 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Next preset a) Next track a) No function

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu o

pan

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu o

pan

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on ins

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on ins

a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls92

Fig. 56 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE

Volume up Volume up

olume down Volume down

nction specified No function specified

nction specified No function specified

Altea_EN.book Seite 92 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Radio navigation system

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls

Fig. 55 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX

Volume up Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down Volume down V

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function specified No fu

Search for last station Previous track

Hold down: Rewind No function specified No fu

AA

AB

AC

AD

Steering wheel controls 93

Safety Fir Technical Data

No function specified

Accept incoming call

(press briefly)

Reject incoming call

(press and hold down)

End ongoing call /estab-

lish call (press briefly)

Switch to private mode

(press and hold down)

Redial last number (press

and hold down)a)

tivation of voice recog-

nition for mobile tele-

hone connected to the

ystem (if the telephone

s this function) / MUTE

Activation of voice recog-

nition for mobile tele-

phone connected to the

system (if the telephone

has this function) / MUTE

perates on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No function speci-

fied

perates on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No function speci-

fied

No function specified Change menu on instru-

ment panel

Altea_EN.book Seite 93 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

No function specified No function specified No function specified

Activation of voice recogni-

tion for mobile telephone

connected to the system (if

the telephone has this func-

tion) / MUTE

Activation of voice recognition

for mobile telephone con-

nected to the system (if the tel-

ephone has this function) /

MUTE

Activation of voice recog-

nition for mobile tele-

phone connected to the

system (if the telephone

has this function) / MUTE

Ac

p

s

ha

Next preset b) Next track b) No function specified O

Previous preset b) Previous track b) No function specified O

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel

AE

AF

AG

AH

AI

Steering wheel controls94

nction specified Change menu on instru-

ment panel

tes on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No function speci-

fied

tes on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No function speci-

fied

edia System 2.1)

Altea_EN.book Seite 94 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel No fu

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

a) For a more detailed description of how to use this button, please refer to the Radio navigation System User Handbook (SEAT M b) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

AJ

AK

AL

Unlocking and locking 95

Safety Fir Technical Data

103, fig. 62 on the remote control to lock all

turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the

isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their

lay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle ly high and low temperatures, depending on g serious injuries/illness. It could even have d lock both the tailgate and all the other doors

vehicle.

with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse children, may result in serious damage and

entally be started and be out of control.

hed on, the electric equipment could be acti- for example, in the electric windows.

ed using the remote control key. This could an emergency situation.

ith you when you leave the vehicle.

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The y engage, and you would not be able to steer

Altea_EN.book Seite 95 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Unlocking and locking

Central locking

Basic functions

The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all

doors by just pushing the button.

Description

Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:

the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it manu-

ally,

the central locking button in the passenger compartment as an electronic

control page 98.

the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key,

page 103

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Locking system Safe

Selective unlocking system*

Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking

Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press button page 103, fig. 62 on remote control to unlock all the

doors and tailgate.

Locking the vehicle*

Press button page

doors and the tailgate or

tailgate.

WARNING

Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.

Never allow children to p can be subjected to extreme the time of year, thus causin fatal consequences. Close an when you are not using the

Always take you car keys of the keys, for example, by accident.

The engine may accid

If the ignition is switc vated with risk of injury,

The doors can be lock make the aid difficult in

Always take the key w

Never remove the key fro steering lock could suddenl the vehicle.

Unlocking and locking96

en the vehicle is locked

button on the remote control within

le is locked without activating the dead-

rning lamp flashes for approx. two

out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts

d opened from the inside if the "safe" deadlock

ill have to pull the door release lever once.

ff, the anti-theft alarm* page 105 remains

nitoring system* and the anti-tow system are

vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech- is not possible to open the doors from the ake it more difficult to assist vehicle occu- ent. People could become trapped inside in an

tem*

lock either just the driver door or all

s the unlock button on the remote once. The

le is deactivated, only the driver door is

nd the warning lamp are also turned off.

Altea_EN.book Seite 96 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Note While the driver door is open, the vehicle can not be locked with the

remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.

If the driver door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver door is

unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched

on, the door "safe" deadlock is deactivated (although the doors remain

locked) and the central locking button is activated. See page 105.

If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver door warning

lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.

For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.

Safety system Safe*

The "safe" deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the

vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking

button are not active (depending upon country).

Activating deadlock

Press once the locking button on the remote control. or

Turn the key once in the driver door lock to lock. A warning lamp

in the driver door flashes to indicate the "safe" deadlock is

working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at

short intervals and then more slowly.

Deactivating deadlock wh

Press twice the locking

two seconds. The vehic

lock. The driver door wa

seconds and then goes

flashing again.

The doors can be unlocked an

has not been activated. You w

When the "safe" deadlock is o

active. The vehicle interior mo

deactivated*.

WARNING

Nobody should remain in the anism has been activated. It inside. Locked doors could m pants in the event of an accid emergency.

Selective unlocking sys

This system allows to un

the vehicle.

Using the remote control, pres

Safe system for all the vehic

unlocked and both the alarm a

Unlocking and locking 97

Safety Fir Technical Data

em for involuntary unlocking*

and prevents the unintentional

.

any of the doors (including the tailgate) are

gets re-locked automatically. This function

aining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed

ystem

ring an accident, the vehicle is unlocked, except

t. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside

turning the ignition off and back on again.

om the outside, see Emergency locking of the

Altea_EN.book Seite 97 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Unlocking all doors and the luggage compartment

The unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice so that all doors

and the luggage compartment can be opened.

Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle,

to unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning lamp

and the alarm (only vehicles fitted with one) are turned off.

Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle

from the outside when it is running (for example, when

stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors and the tailgate are automatically locked when vehicle speed

exceeds 15 km/h.

If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle

moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will

be locked once more.

Unlocking

The driver door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the igni-

tion.

Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for

example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever

inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.

Automatic locking syst

It is an anti-theft system

unlocking of the vehicle

If the vehicle is unlocked and

opened within 30 seconds, it

prevents the vehicle from rem

by mistake.

Emergency unlocking s

If the airbags are triggered du

for the luggage compartmen

with the central locking, after

If the doors must be locked fr

doors

Unlocking and locking98

senger door cannot be locked if any of the

ate) are open. This avoids the user from forget-

.

central locking will deactivate the central

. Once this time has passed, the button if oper-

g the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is

utton when the driver door is closed and any of

g any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and

parately from inside the car. Do this by pulling

ildren and disabled people may be trapped

n is not operative in the following cases:

d from the outside (with the remote or the

ctivated after unlocking the door lock cylinder

ton .

on .

Altea_EN.book Seite 98 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Central locking button

The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the

vehicle from the inside.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button .

Unlocking the doors

Press button .

The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Except when the "safe" security system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking

button:

Locking the doors and tailgate prevents access from the outside (for

safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

The driver and/or front pas

vehicle doors (except the tailg

ting his key inside the vehicle

Repeated operation of the

locking button for 30 seconds

ative again.

There is a danger of leavin

locked by the central locking b

the rear doors open. On closin

the keys remain inside it.

All doors can be locked se

the door release lever once.

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, ch inside it.

The central locking butto

When the vehicle is locke key).

While the ignition is not a with the key.

Note Vehicle locked, amber but

Vehicle unlocked, red butt

Fig. 57 Detailed view of the centre console: central locking system button

Unlocking and locking 99

Safety Fir Technical Data

king

l locking of the doors in case of

failure.

ally

cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for

nti-clockwise for the right hand side door.

ed it can no longer be opened from the outside.

of the remaining doors

e cap fig. 58 printed with a lock image.

ment with a groove in the centre. Insert the key

element clockwise for the right hand side doors

hand side doors.

e door. Once the door has been closed it can no

utside.

Fig. 58 Locking the doors manually

AA

Altea_EN.book Seite 99 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Unlocking and locking - Manual personalisation

Activating selective unlocking

With the driver door open, turn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s

Deactivating selective unlocking

With the driver door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s

The turn signal lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.

Activation of automatic locking

Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

Deactivation of automatic locking

Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.

Emergency manual loc

This permits mechanica

central locking system

Locking the driver door manu

Insert the key in the door lock

the left hand side door and a

Once the door has been clos

Manual (emergency) locking

Open the door and remove th

This will expose a circular ele

into the groove and rotate the

and anticlockwise for the left

Replace the cap and close th

longer be opened from the o

Unlocking and locking100

ents the rear doors from being

This system prevents minors from

tally while the vehicle is running.

Fig. 59 Childproof lock on the left hand side door

Fig. 60 Childproof lock on the right hand side door

Altea_EN.book Seite 100 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver door

Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left

hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.

The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door

handle.

Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors

First the driver door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate the

internal door handle for the required door. If the childproof lock is activated

on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the door is

unlocked but does not open. The exterior door handle may now be used to

open the door.

Note Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),

repeat the previous instructions.

Childproof lock

The childproof lock prev

opened from the inside.

opening a door acciden

Unlocking and locking 101

Safety Fir Technical Data

a remote control, a key without a

astic key tab*

your vehicle consists of the following items:

fig. 61 with folding key bit,

ontrol ,

y, go to an Authorised Service Centre with your

r.

Fig. 61 Set of keys

AA

AB

Altea_EN.book Seite 101 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and

locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated

and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock

Unlock the car and open the door in which you wish to activate

the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-

tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anti-clock-

wise for the right hand side doors page 100, fig. 59

page 100, fig. 60.

Deactivating the childproof lock

Unlock the car and open the door whose childproof lock you want

to deactivate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-

tion key, clockwise for the right hand side doors, and anti-clock-

wise for the left hand side doors page 100, fig. 59

page 100, fig. 60.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the

outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting the

key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.

Keys

Set of keys

The set of keys includes

remote control and a pl

The set of keys belonging to

one remote control key

one key without remote c

a plastic key tab* .

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement ke

vehicle identification numbe

AC

Unlocking and locking102

Altea_EN.book Seite 102 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.

An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could make the aid difficult in an emergency situation.

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle.

Caution There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and

hitting the keys.

Unlocking and locking 103

Safety Fir Technical Data

rrow) on the control, the key shaft is released.

ig. 62 .

62 .

button fig. 62 until all the turn signals

hen the unlocking button is pressed,

he door. Once this time has passed, it will lock

the key fig. 62, will flash.

r and the batteries are integrated in the key. The

The maximum range depends on different

as the batteries start to lose power.

2 , is pressed once, the driver door is

ocked.

twice to unlock all doors.

Fig. 63 Range of the remote control

A1

A2

A3

A3

A1

A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 103 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Radio frequency remote control

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle

from a distance.

Using the button fig. 62 (a

Unlocking the vehicle f

Locking the vehicle fig.

Unlocking the tailgate. Press

on the vehicle flash briefly. W

you have 2 minutes to open t

again.

Also, the battery indicator on

The remote control transmitte

receiver is inside the vehicle.

factors. The range is reduced

Selective unlocking*

When the button fig. 6

unlocked, all others remain l

Press the button fig. 62

Fig. 62 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key

Unlocking and locking104

ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the

ries may damage the radio frequency remote

s replace the dead battery with another of the

vironment wn away in accordance with regulations

e environment.

te control key

lock or lock the door with the remote

ynchronised.

03, fig. 62 button on the remote control.

using the key bit within one minute.

ould no longer be opened and closed with the

is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective

mote control. The remote control key will have

available in your Authorised Service Centres,

to the locking system.

s can be used.

Altea_EN.book Seite 104 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could complicate the aid in case of emergency.

Note The remote control can be programmed by means of pressing the

unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will unlock. When the

button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.

The remote control functions only when you are in range page 103,

fig. 63 (red area).

If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-

matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds

after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked

if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.

If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the

remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 104.

Changing the battery

If the battery indicator does n

battery must be replaced.

Caution The use of inappropriate batte

control. For this reason, alway

same size and power.

For the sake of the en The flat batteries must be thro

governing the protection of th

Synchronising the remo

If it is not possible to un

control, it should be re-s

Press the page 1

Then close the vehicle

It is possible that the vehicle c

remote control if the button

range of the radio frequency re

to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys are

where they must be matched

Up to eight remote control key

A1

Unlocking and locking 105

Safety Fir Technical Data

g the button shown by the (arrow).

door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm

n alarm is not triggered immediately.

hin 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched

r recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates

f you do not switch on the ignition within 15

ed.

via the unlocking button of the remote control

the ignition lock.

f, access is gained to a second secured zone

ter a door has been opened), the warning signal

ns active even if the battery is disconnected or

mediately if one of the battery cables is discon-

m is active.

nction incorporated in the anti-theft

nauthorized vehicle entry by means of

ensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.

Altea_EN.book Seite 105 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description of anti-theft alarm system*

The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are

detected around the vehicle.

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal

it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the key,

or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the

vehicle. The system is then primed.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried

out when the car is locked:

Opening the vehicle mechanically using the key and with the ignition off

Opening a door

Opening the bonnet

Opening the tailgate

Switching on the ignition

Movements in the vehicle inside

Undue manipulation of the alarm

Battery handling

The acoustic signals sound and the turn signals flash for approx. 30 seconds.

This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)

If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the

car. This is done as follows:

Unfold the key by pressin

Use the lock on the driver

system remains active, but a

Switch on the ignition wit

on, the electronic immobilise

the anti-theft alarm system. I

seconds, the alarm is trigger

How to switch the alarm off

When the vehicle is unlocked

or when the key is inserted in

Note If, after the alarm goes of

(e.g. the tailgate is opened af

is triggered again.

Vehicle monitoring remai

not working for any reason.

The alarm is triggered im

nected while the alarm syste

Volumetric sensor*

Monitoring or control fu

alarm* which detects u

ultrasound.

The system consists of 3 s

Unlocking and locking106

Altea_EN.book Seite 106 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Activation

It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the

vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button

on the remote control is used.

Deactivation

Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-

metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-

vated.

WARNING

The safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.

For those vehicles in which a separation screen is fitted, the alarm will not function correctly due to interference with the sensor.

Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-

cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver door. This flashing will be

different to that for an activated alarm.

Unlocking and locking 107

Safety Fir Technical Data

er and lift the tailgate fig. 64. The tail-

ally open.

e of the two handles on the interior lining

lightly.

erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.

t cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked

perative and the tailgate may be opened.

ton or the button on the remote control

trument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-

zer is also given if the tailgate is open when the

/h*.

Fig. 65 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip

A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 107 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Tailgate

Unlocking and locking

The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is

activated by using the handle on the tailgate

Opening the tailgate

Pull on the release lev

gate will be automatic

Closing the tailgate

Hold the tailgate by on

and close it, pushing s

The system may or may not op

If the tailgate is locked then i

then the opening system is o

To lock/unlock, press the but

key.

A warning appears on the ins

erly closed.* An warning buz

car is driven faster than 6 km

Fig. 64 Tailgate: opening from the outside

Unlocking and locking108

o be opened if the central locking

ample, if the battery is flat)

gage compartment allowing access to the

nism.

inside the luggage compartment

ove and unlock the locking system,

ht to left, as shown by the arrow

Fig. 66 Tailgate: emer- gency open

Altea_EN.book Seite 108 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.

Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex- pectedly while driving.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.

Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.

Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened if the key is left inside.

Emergency opening

This allows the vehicle t

does not operate (for ex

There is a groove in the lug

emergency opening mecha

Opening the tailgate from

Insert the key in the gro

turning the key from rig

fig. 66.

Unlocking and locking 109

Safety Fir Technical Data

nt left door

nt right door

ating the electric window buttons in the rear

r left door

r right door

r door can be used to disable the electric

oors.

ttons on rear doors are activated.

s on rear doors are deactivated.

tric windows can result in injury.

ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do us injury to you and third parties. Make sure a window.

key with you when you leave the vehicle.

isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if . An uncontrolled use of the key could start the ric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing

n be locked using the remote control key. This in an emergency situation.

l work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.

ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.

Altea_EN.book Seite 109 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Windows

Opening or closing the windows electrically

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using

the controls on the driver door.

Opening and closing the windows

Press the button to open the window.

Pull button to close the window .

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended

.

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off

the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been

opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Buttons on the driver door

Button for window in fro

Button for window in fro

Buttons for rear windows*

Safety switch for deactiv

doors

Button for window in rea

Button for window in rea

Safety switch *

Safety switch on the drive

window buttons in the rear d

Safety switch not pressed: bu

Safety switch pressed: button

WARNING

Incorrect use of the elec

Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause serio that no one is in the path of

Always take the vehicle

Never leave children or d they have access to the keys engine or activate any elect risk of accident. The doors ca could make the aid difficult

The electric windows wil ignition and one of the front

If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be

Fig. 67 Detail of the driver door: controls for the front and rear windows

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A3

Unlocking and locking110

ork when the ignition has been switched off,

n.

function will not work if the battery has been

f the battery is flat. The function then has to be

ll-back function will not work if there is a

dows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

-back function. This reduces the risk

dows are closing.

hen closing automatically, the window stops

diately .

ediately (within 10 seconds) why the window

empting to close it again. After 10 seconds the

umes.

cted, the window will stop at this point.

n why the window cannot be closed, try to

nds.

econds, the window will open fully when you

ne-touch closing is reactivated.

ll-back function will not work if there is a

dows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

ic windows can result in injury.

Altea_EN.book Seite 110 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-

tion, the window will automatically open again page 110. If this happens,

check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it

again.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to

hold down the button.

One-touch closing

Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The

window closes fully.

One-touch opening

Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.

The window opens fully.

Restoring one-touch opening and closing

Close all windows.

Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in

the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function

is now ready for operation.

The buttons page 109, fig. 67 and have two levels for opening the

window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows

to the desired position.

One-touch closing does not w

even if the key is in the ignitio

The automatic open and close

temporarily disconnected, or i

reactivated.

The one-touch function and ro

malfunction in the electric win

Roll-back function

The windows have a roll

of injuries when the win

If a window is obstructed w

at this point and lowers imme

If this happens, check imm

could not be closed before att

normal automatic function res

If the window is still obstru

If there is no obvious reaso

close it again within five seco

If you wait longer than 5 - 10 s

operate one of the buttons. O

The one-touch function and ro

malfunction in the electric win

WARNING

Incorrect use of the electr

A1 A2

Unlocking and locking 111

Safety Fir Technical Data

button on the remote control for about 3

which function electrically will be either

tton to interrupt the function.

completely closed, the turn signals will

nroof*

e sliding/tilting sunroof

oof is opened and closed using the

ignition is switched on.

Fig. 68 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting sunroof rotary control

Altea_EN.book Seite 111 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehicle.

The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.

Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.

Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the

outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing

page 111.

Convenience opening and closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the

locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either

opened or closed.

Release the key to interrupt this function.

Using the remote control

Push the lock or unlock

seconds. All windows

opened or closed.

Release the unlock bu

Once the windows are

flash.

Sliding/tilting su

Opening and closing th

The sliding/tilting sunr

rotary button when the

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking112

sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if . Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the d make the aid difficult in an emergency situ-

f continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.

r lock of the driver door in the locking

g/tilting sunroof is closed.

rupt this function.

the remote control for about 3 seconds.

oof is closed.

ton to interrupt the function.

sunroof has closed completely, the turn

Altea_EN.book Seite 112 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position fig. 68 .

Opening the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the

convenience position where wind noise is reduced.

To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold

the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired

position.

Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position .

Always close the sliding/tilting sunroof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it

unattended .

The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after

the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front

passenger door are not opened.

Sun visor

The sun visor is opened together with the sliding/tilting sunroof. If required,

it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.

Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without checking there are no obstructions, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never leave children or di they have access to the keys the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This coul ation.

The sliding/tilting sunroo doors is opened and the key

Convenience closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the doo

position until the slidin

Release the key to inter

Using the remote control

Push the lock button on

The sliding/tilting sunr

Release the unlock but

When the sliding/tilting

signals flash once.

AA

AB

AC

AD

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking 113

Safety Fir Technical Data

s a roll-back function which prevents larger

the roof is closed. The roll-back function does

inched against the roof opening. The

and opens again immediately if it is obstructed

as been opened again by the roll-back function,

ing the rotary button at the front in position

ting sunroof has closed fully. Please note that ithout the roll-back function.

reakdown

unroof may be closed manually.

by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.

e cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far

the spring) and close the sliding roof.

ition.

Fig. 70 Emergency closing handle

AA

Altea_EN.book Seite 113 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected

if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and

will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.

Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting sunroof*

The sliding/tilting sunroof ha

objects getting trapped when

not prevent fingers getting p

sliding/tilting sunroof stops

when closing.

If the sliding/tilting sunroof h

it can be closed only by press

fig. 69 until the sliding/til

the sunroof will now close w

Operation in the event of a b

In case of a breakdown, the s

Remove the plastic cover

Remove the lever from th

as possible (pushing against

Fit the lever back into pos

Fig. 69 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting sunroof rotary control

Lights and visibility114

s*

osition or to the first stop. The

witch lights up.

ights (vehicles with front fog lights)

osition or to the second stop

lights up in the instrument panel.

lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)

m position to the last stop. A warning

strument panel.

lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are te the road ahead and to ensure that other

u. Always use your dipped beam headlights if r.

ts will only work with the ignition on. The side

when the ignition is turned off.

the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

river door remains open. This is a reminder to

ht that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You

nly when visibility is very poor.

Altea_EN.book Seite 114 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Lights and visibility

Lights

Switching lights on and off

Switching on the side lights

Turn the light switch fig. 71 to position .

Switching on dipped beam headlights

Turn the light switch to position .

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to position 0.

Switching on the fog light

Pull the switch out of p

symbol in the light s

Switching on the rear fog l

Pull the switch out of p

. A warning lamp

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the light switch fro

lamp lights up in the in

WARNING

Never drive with just the side not bright enough to illumina road users are able to see yo it is dark or if visibility is poo

Note The dipped beam headligh

lights come on automatically

If the lights are left on after

a buzzer will sound while the d

switch the lights off.

The rear fog light is so brig

should use the rear fog light o

Fig. 71 Detailed view of the dash panel: lights, fog lights and rear fog light switch

Lights and visibility 115

Safety Fir Technical Data

0.

l is switched on, dipped beam headlights are

a photosensor if you drive into a tunnel, for

he dipped beam headlights when the wind-

rating continuously for a few seconds and it

the continuous or intermittent wipe is switched

128.

ight control is connected but the dipped lights

lights up on the light control fig. 72. If the

n the dipped lights, the instrument and control

ntrol is switched on, the headlights will not be rain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be

e automatic headlight system, when the key is

e acoustic signal will only sound if the light

r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming

omatic light function is switched on, the fog

be switched on in addition.

scribed here is subject to the relevant statutory

Altea_EN.book Seite 115 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with

a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically

be switched off.

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory

requirements.

Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and tail

lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence

on the useful life of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when they

are switched on.

Automatic lighting*

Activation

Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light

up.

Deactivation

Turn the light switch to

Automatic lighting

If automatic headlight contro

automatically switched on by

example.

The rain sensor switches on t

screen wipers have been ope

switches the lights off when

off for some minutes page

When the automatic dipped l

are off, the warning lamp

automatic control switches o

lighting is also switched on.

WARNING

If automatic headlight co switched on in fog or heavy switched on manually.

Note For those vehicles with th

removed from the ignition, th

control is in the position o

home function.

If the daylight driving aut

lights or rear fog light cannot

The use of the lighting de

requirements.

Fig. 72 Automatic lighting

Lights and visibility116

ed light in combination with the daytime )

the daytime lighting are activated at the same

e instrument panel lighting will automatically

ntering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go

d light control switches off the dipped lights

nel), the daytime lights come back on.

, move the turn signal and main beam lever

gnal and headlamp flash).

conds while holding this position. The daytime

e switched on.

ts

, move the turn signal and main beam lever

gnal and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-

conds while holding this position. The daytime

not be switched on.

i-xenon lamps)

, move the turn signal and main beam lever

gnal and headlamp flash).

conds. The daytime lights are deactivated and

enon lamps)

, move the turn signal and main beam lever

gnal and headlamp flash).

onds. The daytime lights are activated and can

Altea_EN.book Seite 116 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.

To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go

off when the tailgate is opened (depending on the country).

Daytime lights*

The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing

the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are

enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is

automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.

Daytime lights (halogen lamps)20)

The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.

These include the dipped, side and number plate lights.

The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the

light setting is in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, a control

lamp on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel

will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.

It is not possible for the driver to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please

contact a qualified workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.

Daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)

The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.

The lights are built-in separately to the headlights and are switched on each

time the ignition is turned on if the light setting is in position 0 or .

Automatic control of the dipp lighting (bi-xenon headlamps

If the dipped light control and

time, the dipped lights and th

come on as required (e.g. on e

off. When the automatic dippe

(e.g. on coming out of the tun

Activating the daytime lights

With the ignition switched off

upwards and back (left turn si

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

lights are activated and can b

Deactivating the daytime ligh

With the ignition switched off

upwards and back (left turn si

tion.

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

lights are deactivated and can

Deactivating daytime lights (b

With the ignition switched off

upwards and back (left turn si

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

can not be switched on.

Activating daytime lights (bi-x

With the ignition switched off

upwards and back (left turn si

Switch on the ignition for 3 sec

be switched on.

20) It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra

Lights and visibility 117

Safety Fir Technical Data

ition and

darkness.

itches off in the following cases:

elay in switching off the headlamps has ended

ain.

d to position .

on.

itching off the headlamps in the Coming Home

an be changed or the function can be connected

Lights and visibility page 76.

ved while the lights are on, and the lights are

door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as

tion is on, the lights are automatically switched

ept when the light switch is in position or

Altea_EN.book Seite 117 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your

country.

Coming home / leaving home function*

The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The

Leaving Home function is controlled with a photosensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side

and dipped lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to

provide assistance.

Coming home function

The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and

briefly flashing the lights. When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home

lighting comes on. If the driver door is already open when the lights are

flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.

When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home

function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off

the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.

If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the tailgate remain

open.

If the light switch is turned to position .

If the ignition is switched on.

Leaving home function

The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:

the light control is in pos

the photosensor detects

The Leaving Home lighting sw

If the time period for the d

If the vehicle is locked ag

If the light switch is turne

If the ignition is switched

Note The setting for the delay in sw

and Leaving Home function c

or disconnected in the menu

If the ignition key is remo

flashed briefly and the driver

when the Coming Home func

off after a period of time (exc

.

Lights and visibility118

oming traffic more than necessary. At the same

light settings, the driver has the best possible

justed when the dipped beam is switched on.

umb wheel down from the basic setting 0.

trol

ulbs (xenon bulbs) are equipped with

rol. This means that the headlights will be

of the vehicle and nodding movements when

tomatically compensated for.

ulbs do not have headlight range control.

or driving round bends)

nds, the headlights will light the

the road.

A2

Fig. 74 Cornering lighting using adaptive headlights

Altea_EN.book Seite 118 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control

Instrument and switch lighting

When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and

switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the

thumb wheel fig. 73 .

The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination

and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-

rated in the instrument panel.

The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition

is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-

matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the

ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver

to switch on the dipped beam headlights in good time when light conditions

become poor.

Headlight range control

By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-

light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is

possible to avoid dazzling onc

time, by using the correct head

lighting for the road ahead.

The headlights can only be ad

To lower the beam, turn the th

Dynamic headlight range con

Vehicles with gas discharge b dynamic headlight range cont adjusted to suit the load level

pulling off and braking are au

Vehicles with gas discharge b

Adaptive headlights* (f

When driving around be

most important areas of

Fig. 73 Dash panel: regu- lation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control

A1

A1

A2

A2

Lights and visibility 119

Safety Fir Technical Data

am control is switched on, the dipped beam hed on in fog. They should be switched on tch. The driver is personally responsible for the tuations. Automatic headlight control is the driver. Where necessary, switch on the ht switch.

hts are used to draw the attention of

r vehicle in emergencies.

n:

afe distance from moving traffic.

Fig. 75 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights

Altea_EN.book Seite 119 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Dynamic cornering lights* (AFS)

The dynamic cornering lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more

than 10 km/h and the dipped headlights are on. When taking a bend, the

road is illuminated better with directional gas discharge bulbs than with

conventional fixed headlights.

A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the

instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or

instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument

panel display. Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault

repaired.

If the control bulb lights up on the instrument panel but all the bulbs are

operating correctly page 267, there may still be a fault in the dynamic

curve lighting system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and

have the fault repaired.

WARNING

If the automatic dipped beam control is switched on, the dipped beam headlights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct use of lights in all situations. Automatic headlight control is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manually using the light switch.

Fog lights with cornering function*

When the turn signal is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right

or left fog lamp automatically comes on to function as a cornering light. The

cornering light only operates if the dipped lights are on.

WARNING

If the automatic dipped be headlights will not be switc manually using the light swi correct use of lights in all si merely a system to support lights manually using the lig

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning lig

other road users to you

If your vehicle breaks dow

1. Park your vehicle at a s

Lights and visibility120

creases if your vehicle breaks down. Always s and a warning triangle to draw the attention ationary vehicle.

alytic converter could come into contact with the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt

the hazard warning lights are left on for a long

itched off.

ing lights described here is subject to the rele-

Altea_EN.book Seite 120 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the engine off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic

move the gear lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users

to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for

instance when:

reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,

there is an emergency

your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,

you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are

switched on. That is that the two turn signal turn signal lamps and the

turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard

warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than 80

km/h, the brake light flashes several times per second to warn vehicles

driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come

on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-

matically when the vehicle starts to move again.

WARNING

The risk of an accident in use the hazard warning light of other road users to your st

Never park where the cat inflammable materials under petrol. This could start a fire!

Note The battery will run down if

time, even if the ignition is sw

The use of the hazard warn

vant statutory requirements.

Lights and visibility 121

Safety Fir Technical Data

and off

on, push the lever forward fig. 76

beam.

the steering wheel fig. 76 to switch

the steering wheel to operate the

ts

and remove the key from the lock.

own to turn the right or left-hand parking

.

ther drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the e headlight flasher if they could dazzle other

k when the ignition is switched on. The corre-

flashes in the instrument panel. The warning

rn signals are operated, provided a trailer is

cted to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-

s at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs

does not light up. Change the bulb.

A3

A4

A4

Altea_EN.book Seite 121 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Turn signal and main beam headlight lever

The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the

parking lights and the headlight flasher.

The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following

functions:

Switching on the turn signals

Move the lever all the way up fig. 76 to indicate right, and

all the way down to indicate left.

Signalling a lane change

Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur

resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several

times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.

Switching main beam on

If the dipped lights are

to switch on the main

Push the lever towards

off the main beam.

Headlight flashers

Pull the lever towards

flasher.

Switching on parking ligh

Switch the ignition off

Move the lever up or d

lights on, respectively

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle o main beam headlights or th drivers.

Note The turn signals only wor

sponding warning lamp or

lamp flashes when the tu

correctly attached and conne

tive, the warning lamp flashe

are damaged, warning lamp

Fig. 76 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever

A1

A2

A1 A2

Lights and visibility122

1

d to select the following positions:

not activated). The interior lights are automat-

hicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

x. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-

en the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

n .

fig. 77.

Fig. 77 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

Altea_EN.book Seite 122 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam

headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instru-

ment panel.

The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if

no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the

instrument panel.

When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light

on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only

work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a

buzzer gives an warning buzzer while the driver door is open.

If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the

ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This

is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave

the parking light on.

Interior lights

Interior front light, type

The switch fig. 77 is use

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position (

ically switched on when the ve

ignition lock And turn off appro

rior lights are switched off wh

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to the positio

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O

AA

Lights and visibility 123

Safety Fir Technical Data

n .

fig. 78.

closed, the interior lights will be switched off

viding the key has been removed and the cour-

his prevents the battery from discharging.

Altea_EN.book Seite 123 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off

after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-

tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Interior front light, type 2

The switch fig. 78 is used to select the following positions:

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-

ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

ignition lock And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-

rior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to the positio

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O

Note If not all the vehicle doors are

after approx. 10 minutes, pro

tesy light position selected. T

Fig. 78 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

AA

Lights and visibility124

ff

n to switch the reading light off.

g lights*

d to select the following positions:

, the interior and reading lights are switched

t

(left reading light) or to position (right

. The interior lights are automatically switched

d or the key removed from the ignition lock The

Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.

A4

Altea_EN.book Seite 124 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Front reading lights

Switching on the reading light

Press the corresponding button fig. 79 and fig. 80 to switch on

the reading light.

Switching the reading lights o

Press the corresponding butto

Rear interior and readin

The switch fig. 81 is use

Interior light switched off 0

In switch position fig. 81

off.

Switching on the reading ligh

Turn the switch to position

reading light).

Courtesy light position

Turn the control to position

on when the vehicle is unlocke

Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1

Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2

AB AB

AC

A1

A2

A3

Lights and visibility 125

Safety Fir Technical Data

nd the front passenger can be pulled out of their

vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 82

isors have covers. When you open the cover ,

ill go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed

ed back up.

ut 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-

ttery from discharging.

A2

Altea_EN.book Seite 125 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are

switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

Interior lights or both reading lights switched on

Turn the control to position .

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off

after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-

tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Visibility

Sun visors

The sun visors for the driver a

mountings in the centre of the

The vanity mirrors in the sun v

a lamp in the roof lights up.

The light* in the roof lining w

back or the sun visor is push

Note The roof lamp will turn off abo

tion key. This prevents the ba

A5

Fig. 82 Sun visor on the driver side

A1

Lights and visibility126

the left or right to set the length of the

left: long intervals; control to the right:

er interval stages can be set using switch

sition .

sition .

position to give the windscreen a brief

rt to move faster if you keep the lever

r than 2 seconds.

system

e steering wheel - Position . The wash

diately and the wipers will start with a

nd wiper systems will function at the

over 120 km/h.

ipers will keep running for approximately

n the wiper blade* area (page

me versions, there is the possibility of heating

the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-

is switched on by pressing the heated rear

A2

A3

A4

A5

Altea_EN.book Seite 126 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Windscreen wipers

Front windscreen wipers

The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers

and the automatic wash and wipe.

The windscreen wiper lever fig. 83 has the following positions:

Switching off the wipers

Move the lever to position .

Intermittent wipe

Move the lever up to position .

Move the control to

intervals. Control to the

short intervals. Four wip

.

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to po

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to po

Brief wipe

Move the lever down to

wipe. The wiper will sta

pressed down for longe

Wash and wipe automatic

Pull the lever towards th

function will start imme

slight delay. The wash a

same time at speeds of

Release the lever. The w

four seconds.

Optional heated windscreen i

In some countries and with so

the windscreen in the area of

icing in the zone. The function

window key .

Fig. 83 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever

A0

A1

AA

AA

Lights and visibility 127

Safety Fir Technical Data

ipe function is on, the intervals are directly

is way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter

away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.

the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the

r back on again.

cts that may be trapped in the side areas of the

wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).

ated jets is controlled automatically when the

nding upon the outside temperature.

Altea_EN.book Seite 127 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and safety levels while driving.

In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

Always note the corresponding warnings on page 237.

Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the

glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers

when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both

the wiper blades and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.

In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only

work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.

When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the

lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.

The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed

page 126, fig. 83 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed

will be resumed when the vehicle starts again

The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once

the automatic wipe/wash system has been operated, provided the vehicle

is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three seconds

after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.

For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and

then on again.

When the intermittent w

proportional to the speed. Th

the intervals.

The wiper will try to wipe

The wiper will stop moving if

obstacle and switch the wipe

Before removing any obje

windscreen, always move the

The heat output of the he

ignition is switched on, depe

A2

A3

Lights and visibility128

or

iper lever into position fig. 85.

the left or right to set the sensitivity of the

he right: highly sensitive. Control to the

nterval wipe function. You will have to switch

witch off the ignition. This is done by switching

off and back on.

windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

lts.

A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 128 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen

wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.

Switching on the rain sens

Move the windscreen w

Move the control to

rain sensor. Control to t

left: less sensitive.

The rain sensor is part of the i

the rain sensor back on if you s

the wiper intermittent function

Note Do not put stickers on the

cause sensor disruption or fau

Fig. 84 Rain sensor*

Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper lever

AA

Lights and visibility 129

Safety Fir Technical Data

een wiper and washer system

wards to position fig. 86. The wash

ediately and the wiper will start with a

creen wash system will function as long as

is position.

wiper then wipes for approximately 4

ntervals again.

washer system stops and the wipers func-

de will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.

onding warnings on page 237.

k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass

first time. If you switch on the wiper when the

lass, this could damage both the wiper blade

l only function when the ignition is switched on

indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-

ipe.

A7

Altea_EN.book Seite 129 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear window wiper

The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper

and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.

Switching on the interval wipe

Press the lever forwards to position fig. 86. The wiper will

wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.

Switching off the interval wipe function

Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.

The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch

off whilst the wipers are in motion.

Switching on the windscr

Press the lever fully for

function will start imm

slight delay. The winds

you hold the lever in th

Release the lever. The

seconds, and then in i

Release the lever. The

tion.

WARNING

A worn or dirty wiper bla

Always note the corresp

Caution In icy conditions, always chec

before using the wiper for the

wiper blade is frozen to the g

and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wiper wil

and the tailgate is closed.

In reverse gear, with the w

screen wiper will make one w

Fig. 86 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper

A6

A6

Lights and visibility130

nterior mirror*

le function can be switched on and off

unction

87. Indicator lamp goes off.

unction

87. Warning lamp is lit.

ivated every time the ignition is switched on.

s up in the mirror housing.

is enabled, the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle func-

r is engaged.

Fig. 87 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.

AB

Altea_EN.book Seite 130 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Headlight washer system*

The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.

The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen

washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering

wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped beam headlights or

main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the

headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.

Note To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the

nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer

spray.

To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to

time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.

Rear-view mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the

rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror

In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should

be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.

Automatic anti-dazzle i

The automatic anti-dazz

as desired.

Switching off anti-dazzle f

Press button fig.

Switching on anti-dazzle f

Press button fig.

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is act

The green indicator lamp light

When the anti-dazzle function

matically according to the am

tion is cancelled if reverse gea

AA

AA

Lights and visibility 131

Safety Fir Technical Data

position the mirror so that you have a

f the vehicle.

(right exterior mirror).

to position the mirror so that you have a

f the car .

rs*

to the central position fig. 88 so

ew mirrors warm up and the heated wind-

ade rest area is activated page 126.

ting is not activated in temperatures

0C.

s*

88 to position to fold in the exterior

ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are

omatic car wash. This will help prevent

ith convenience control*

fold back automatically with convenience

te or the key).

n the door and use the contact.

ack out to the extended position*

er position to fold the exterior mirrors back

A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 131 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun

blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects

preventing light from reaching the rear view mirror.

If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in

front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from

working well or even from working at all.

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in

the centre console.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob fig. 88 to position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to

good view to the rear o

3. Turn knob to position R

4. Swivel the rotary knob

good view to the rear o

Heating the exterior mirro

Turn the knob forwards

that the heated rear vi

screen* in the wiper bl

The exterior mirror hea

above approximately 2

Folding in exterior mirror

Turn the control fig.

mirrors. You should alw

driving through an aut

damage.

Folding exterior mirrors w

The exterior mirror will

closing (with the remo

To unfold it again, ope

Folding exterior mirrors b

Turn the knob to anoth

out .

Fig. 88 Controls of exte- rior mirrors

Lights and visibility132

e adjusted separately or simultaneously, as

exterior mirrors is not activated at speeds of

Altea_EN.book Seite 132 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Synchronised mirror adjustment

1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a

good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will

be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).

WARNING

Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.

If possible, use the rear view mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.

Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer

needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be

adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be

observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the

adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be

completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as

this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.

The rear view mirrors can b

described before.

The fold-in function on the

above 40 km/h.

Seats and storage compartments 133

Safety Fir Technical Data

the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never , out of the window or on the seat. This is also correct sitting position exposes you to an se of a sudden braking or an accident. If the d sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect

iver and front passenger to keep a distance of ing wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the at the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal the driver and the steering wheel or between

dash panel should always be as great as

passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the eat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle

se the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts.

to installing a child seat on the front lling a child seat, please observe the warnings hild safety.

Altea_EN.book Seite 133 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seats and storage compartments

The importance of correct seat adjustment

Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection

offered by seat belts and airbags.

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is

equipped with a three-point seat belt.

The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to

suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat

position is very important for:

a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,

a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,

a safe driving page 7,

ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protec-

tion page 19.

WARNING

If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.

More people than available seats must never be transported in your vehicle.

Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 46, Child safety.

The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.

Always keep your feet on rest them on the dash panel applied to passengers. An in increased risk of injury in ca airbag is triggered, you coul sitting position.

It is important for the dr at least 25 cm from the steer minimum distance means th injury. The distance between the front passenger and the possible.

Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise, your s is moving. This could increa In addition, while adjusting position. Risk of fatal accide

Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When insta described in page 46, C

WARNING (continued)

Seats and storage compartments134

nt so that the top is at the same level as

as close as possible to the same level as

least at eye level fig. 89 and fig. 90.

page 135.

estraints removed or improperly adjusted njuries.

restraints could lead to death in the event of

restraints also increase the risk of injury driving or braking manoeuvres.

always be adjusted according to the

Fig. 90 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

Altea_EN.book Seite 134 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Head restraints

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restrai

the top of your head or

the top of your head, at

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head r increases the risk of severe i

Improperly adjusted head a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head during sudden or unexpected

The head restraints must passenger's height.

Fig. 89 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

Seats and storage compartments 135

Safety Fir Technical Data

raint, press the button and push head

d restraint engages securely in one of its

eats)

t forward or back to the required position.

int

t up as far as it will go.

. 91 (arrow).

of fitting without releasing the button.

nt into the guides on the backrest.

wn.

int to suit body size page 14 and

straints have been removed. Risk of injury.

straints are in an unsuitable position, there is

straint, you must always adjust it properly for otection.

y warnings in page 134, Correct adjust-

Altea_EN.book Seite 135 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Removing or adjusting head restraints

The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and

down.

Adjusting height (front seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head

restraint downwards.

Make sure that it engages securely into position.

Adjusting height (rear seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head rest

restraint downwards.

Make sure that the hea

positions page 14.

Angle adjustment (front s

Press the head restrain

Removing the head restra

Push the head restrain

Press the button fig

Pull head restraint out

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrai

Push head restraint do

Adjust the head restra

page 13.

WARNING

Never drive if the head re

Never drive if the head re a risk of serious injury.

After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pr

Please observe the safet ment of head restraints.

Fig. 91 Adjusting and removing the head restraints

Seats and storage compartments136

angle

backrest and turn the hand wheel.

upport*

backrest and turn the hand wheel to

ort.

, the curvature of the cushioned area of the

or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the

.

front passenger seat while the vehicle is in seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting ts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat

ionary.

y to the driver and front passenger in case of ent, never drive with the backrest tilted m protection of the seat belt can be achieved n an upright position and the driver and front

usted their seat belts. The further the back- e greater the risk of injury due to improper

curing the seat height into forwards/back- e caused if the seat height is adjusted n.

Altea_EN.book Seite 136 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Front seats

Adjustment of the front seats

The control elements in fig. 92 are mirrored for the front right-

hand seat.

Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards

Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.

Then release the grip and move the seat further until the

catch engages.

Adjusting the seat height*

Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from

its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.

Adjusting the backrest

Take your weight off the

Adjusting the lumbar s

Take your weight off the

adjust the lumbar supp

As you make the adjustments

lumbar region becomes more

natural curvature of the spine

WARNING

Never adjust the driver or motion. While adjusting your position. Risk of fatal acciden only when the vehicle is stat

To reduce the risk of injur a sudden braking or an accid towards the rear. The maximu only when the backrests are i passenger have properly adj rests are tilted to the rear, th positioning of the belt web!

Exercise caution when se wards position. Injuries can b without due care and attentio

Fig. 92 Front left seat controls

A1

A1

A2

A3

A4

Seats and storage compartments 137

Safety Fir Technical Data

icles without Climatronic

umb wheel fig. 93 to switch on the seat

ing is switched off in the 0 position.

icles with Climatronic

itch on the seat heating.

heating at maximum level (level 3).

heating at medium level (level 2).

t seat heating at minimum level (level 1).

ssed four times, the heating goes off and

l 0).

hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb

nd the right thumb wheel the right seat.

g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or

gle point to the seat cushion and backrest.

Altea_EN.book Seite 137 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Heated seats*

The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-

cally.

Front seat heating for veh

Turn the appropriate th

heating. The seat heat

Front seat heating for veh

Press button to sw

Press once to set seat

Press twice to set seat

Press three times to se

When the button is pre

the LED goes out (leve

The seat heating only works w

wheel controls the left seat a

Caution To avoid damaging the heatin

apply sharp pressure at a sin

Fig. 93 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating

Fig. 94 Front seat heating with Climatronic

AA

Seats and storage compartments138

rwards or backwards independently. The

/3 of the seat. There are various possible

unlock the lever in the direction of the

forwards or backwards to the desired

t

top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat

ection of the arrow and hold the loop in

backrest to the required position and

the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your ly while the vehicle is moving. This could nt and therefore, injury.

down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid .

e moved, is fixed in position.

aximum luggage compartment space, put the

without moving.

aximum space without putting the backrests

to the desired position.

Altea_EN.book Seite 138 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Rear seats

Seat adjustment

The seats may be moved fo

movement can be 1/3 or 2

positions.

Adjusting reach

In the seated position,

arrow fig. 95.

Move the seat cushion

position.

Backrest angle adjustmen

Hold the backrest at the

fig. 96 in the dir

this position. Push the

release the loop.

WARNING

Adjust the seat only when seat could move unexpected increase the risk of an accide

Do not push the backrests damage to the centre console

Ensure that the seat, onc

Note In order to maintain the m

backrests in position normal,

In order to maintain the m

down, move the seats forward

Fig. 95 For unlocking the rear seat

Fig. 96 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment

A1

Seats and storage compartments 139

Safety Fir Technical Data

ackrests down

e of the seat fig. 98 in the direction

e seat backrest into position.

e backrest has engaged properly in position

on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be

ckrest into position ensure that the seat belts

Fig. 98 Folding or opening the front seat backrests

A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 139 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Folding the seat backrests down

Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 97

In this position the backrest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located

on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the

backrest.

WARNING

You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.

The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.

Folding the rear seat b

Pull the loop on the sid

of the arrow and lift th

WARNING

You should check that th after the loop is released.

The locking system loops used to secure any items.

After locking the seat ba protrude from the seat.

Fig. 97 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests

A1

Seats and storage compartments140

with storage area

n the armrest.

a, lift the armrest up in the direction of

d then lift the cover.

r* or the lower storage area, pull on the

ressing on the button.

a, push the armrest down.

closed while the vehicle is in motion to the armrest during a sudden braking an accident.

Fig. 100 Front armrest with storage area

Altea_EN.book Seite 140 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Storage compartment

Storage compartment on the front passenger side

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 99.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.

Centre armrest at front

There is a storage area i

To open the storage are

the arrow fig. 100 an

To access the CD loade

armrest cover without p

To close the storage are

WARNING

Always keep the storage area reduce the risk of injury from manoeuvre or in the event of

Fig. 99 Passenger side: storage compartment

Seats and storage compartments 141

Safety Fir Technical Data

aximum weight of 1.5 kg.

wer cover open. There is an injury risk for leased in case of sudden braking or an

to the rear of the front seat backrests.

it up in the direction of the arrow

Fig. 102 Folding tray on the front left seat

Altea_EN.book Seite 141 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.

Storage areas under the front seats*

There is a storage locker with a cover under each front seat.

The drawer* fig. 101 is opened by pushing the button and putting the

cover back.

There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-

sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if

too much pressure is applied.

To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.

WARNING

The drawers will hold a m

Do not drive with the dra passengers if the cargo is re accident.

Folding tray*

Folding trays are fitted

To open the tray, open

fig. 102.

Fig. 101 Storage area under the front seats

AA

Seats and storage compartments142

cover to open these compartments

ill then open.

s it up until it engages.

cover closed while the vehicle is in motion to g a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event any items from being thrown through the

Altea_EN.book Seite 142 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

The folding trays may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The tray must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be

spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.

Roof storage compartment*

There are four storage compartments in the roof

Press the button on the

fig. 103. The cover w

To close the cover, pres

WARNING

Always keep the storage area reduce the risk of injury durin of an accident and to prevent vehicle interior.

Fig. 103 Roof storage compartments

Seats and storage compartments 143

Safety Fir Technical Data

rtment floor and fold it back all the way

fig. 105, into the side grooves depending

ts to be transported. The on-board tool kit

re located underneath the luggage

um authorised weight for the vehicle

net*

in the luggage compartment for

Fig. 106 Retaining net

Altea_EN.book Seite 143 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Storage in the luggage compartment*

There is a variable storage area* in the luggage compartment

floor.

Lift the luggage compa

fig. 104.

Fit the separator on the size of the objec

and the spare wheel a

compartment.

Note Do not exceed the maxim

page 287.

Luggage compartment

There is a retaining net

securing objects.

Fig. 104 Foldable luggage compartment cover

Fig. 105 Luggage compartment divider

AA

Seats and storage compartments144

any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging dden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the

of the gear lever, there are two drink holders

the drink holders. During normal or sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be

Fig. 107 Front drink holders

Altea_EN.book Seite 144 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage

compartment to attach the retaining net page 143, fig. 106.

Note Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle

page 287.

Other storage areas

Other storage areas can be found:

in the centre console,

in the door trims (front and rear),

in the side trims of the luggage compartment,

in the spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles

with an optional anti-puncture kit*.

The clothes hooks are located on the rear roof handles.

WARNING

Do not store loose objects on the dash panel. These objects could be flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. while accelerating, braking or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of accident.

Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other storage areas into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or accelerator. Risk of accident.

Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view. Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti-

cles of clothing. Do not leave articles of clothing. During su cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.

Front drinks holders

In the centre console, in front

fig. 107.

WARNING

Never place hot drinks in driving manoeuvres, sudden spilled. Danger of scalding.

WARNING (continued)

Seats and storage compartments 145

Safety Fir Technical Data

armrest*/ drink holder*

in the direction of the arrow fig. 108

holder*/ armrest* in the direction of the

ggage compartment is correctly secured with ling with the armrest down page 143.

Fig. 109 Rear armrest/drink holder

Altea_EN.book Seite 145 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.

Rear drink holder*/ Armrest*

Opening and closing the

To open, pull the loop

.

To close, lift the Drink

arrow fig. 109 .

WARNING

Ensure that the load in the lu the retainer net when travel

WARNING (continued)

Fig. 108 Opening the rear drink holders

A1

A2

Seats and storage compartments146

partment

ction of the rear seat backrest, in order to

of the backrest.

ompartment mounting plate

ide of the vehicle, through the rear

ould be fitted between the backrest and

seat area.

lips the cushion frame. The rings of the

tment mounting plate appear at the front

the plate clip, tilt the rear backrest of the

slightly and then lean the backrest back-

g of the mobile storage compartment

e easier.

e compartment onto the foam of the

es together fig. 110, with both

g. 111 and press hard until both the clips

h the rings.

compartment

fig. 110 on the clips (red buttons)

p out of place.

n and remove the mobile storage

plate.

AH

AE

AF

Altea_EN.book Seite 146 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment* - Fitting and removal

This storage compartment may only be placed in the central

area of the rear seat

Fitting mobile storage com

Fold down the small se

access the large section

Fit the mobile storage c

fig. 111 from the ins

section of the seat. It sh

the seat, in the central

Push the plate until it c

mobile storage compar

of the seat.

If it is difficult to make

large section forwards

wards to make the fittin

onto the mounting plat

Place the mobile storag

central seat.

Set both mounting piec

mounting rings fi

completely connect wit

Removing mobile storage

Pull each of the buttons

forwards, until they sna

Fold the larger seat dow

compartment mounting

Fig. 110 Mobile storage compartment Installation

Fig. 111 Mobile storage compartment mounting plate

AG

Seats and storage compartments 147

Safety Fir Technical Data

ea fig. 112.

until it clips into place.

ompartment

partment may be used to store small objects

ers in the event that the objects are flung

icle.

d for holding drink cans or cups.

e may be used for keeping papers and maga-

s a support for writing.

3, it must be removed from its compartment in

compartment and fitted into slot fig. 113

bile storage compartment.

mpartment is fitted in the left-hand slot of the

mpartment and the table in the left-hand

ight-hand slot.

s for use and cannot be interchanged.

artment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do

ver of the mobile storage compartment is

bles are set up for use.

AA

AD

Altea_EN.book Seite 147 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Multi-purpose* mobile storage compartment - General information

This storage compartment may only be placed in the central

area of the rear seat

Opening

Lift the cover , in ar

Closing

Push the cover down,

Uses of the mobile storage c

The front open glove com

that will not damage passeng

around the interior of the veh

The drink holders are use

The elastic belt on the sid

zines.

The tables may be used a

To use the table fig. 11

the side of the mobile storage

on the front section of the mo

The table in the right-hand co

front of the mobile storage co

compartment is fitted in the r

The tables have two position

WARNING

The mobile storage comp not overload.

Do not drive when the co open.

Do not drive when the ta

Fig. 112 Mobile storage compartment opening

Fig. 113 Mobile storage compartment functions

AB

AC

Seats and storage compartments148

te lighter* and electrical

shtray

the cover fig. 114.

r down.

empty it.

y. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the

Fig. 114 Ashtray located in the front drink holder

Altea_EN.book Seite 148 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

When the vehicle is moving, keep the tables stored inside the mobile storage compartment with the cover closed, and likewise when they are not in use

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. The drink may spill and cause burns when the vehicle is moving.

Do not leave cans in the drink holder when the vehicle is in motion, there is a danger that the can may be flung around the vehicle and cause injury.

Make sure that the mounting plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion frame.

When the plate is not in use, store inside the storage compartment.

When the mobile storage compartment is not in use, it should always be fastened by the retaining net in the luggage compartment.

Note Check that the mobile storage compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it

forwards by the front glove compartment and checking that both safety clips

are correctly clipped onto the rings.

Ashtrays*, cigaret sockets

Ashtray*

Opening and closing the a

To open the ashtray, lift

To close, push the cove

Emptying the ashtray

Extract the ashtray and

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtra ashtray and cause a fire.

WARNING (continued)

Seats and storage compartments 149

Safety Fir Technical Data

n be connected to any of the 12 volt

connected to the 12 volt power point in the front

he passenger compartment and that of the

ppliances connected to each power point must

120 Watt.

onnected accessories will only operate when e engine is running. Improper use of the ries can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. ever leave children alone inside the vehicle.

Fig. 116 Electric socket, centre console, front

Altea_EN.book Seite 149 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Cigarette lighter*

Press on the cigarette lighter fig. 115 to activate it .

Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the

glowing coil.

WARNING

Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start a fire.

Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.

The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.

Electrical sockets

Electrical equipment ca

sockets.

Electrical accessories may be

centre console fig. 116of t

luggage compartment* The a

not exceed a power rating of

WARNING

The power sockets and the c the ignition is on or when th sockets or electrical accesso To avoid the risk of injury, n

Fig. 115 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console

Seats and storage compartments150

s an audio input (red and white connectors) or

d, white and yellow connectors). For more

udio and video source, see the RSE manual.

Fig. 118 AUX RSE connection

Altea_EN.book Seite 150 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a

battery discharge.

Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions in

page 219.

Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)*

Lift the AUX. cover fig. 117.

Insert the plug as far as possible (see Radio manual).

AUX RSE connection*

This connector may be used a

audio and video connector (re

details about the use of this a

Fig. 117 Auxiliary audio connection

Seats and storage compartments 151

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing triangle, fire

Fig. 120 Warning triangle storage under the rear cover

Fig. 121 Opening the storage compartment

Altea_EN.book Seite 151 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

MEDIA-IN* connector

For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio

handbook.

First-aid kit, warn extinguisher

Warning triangle

Fig. 119 Connection in central armrest compart- ment

Seats and storage compartments152

ent

urely stowed.

ng points to ensure the vehicle handles

venly as possible.

far forward in the luggage compartment

ggage compartment with suitable straps

loose items in the vehicle can cause serious

age compartment can suddenly move and andles.

es or accidents, loose objects in the be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.

e luggage compartment and secure with suit- important for heavy objects.

y objects, always take in account that a y can also cause changes in vehicle handling.

on on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.

Altea_EN.book Seite 152 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The warning triangle* is located in a storage compartment under the rear

shelf page 151, fig. 120. To open this storage compartment, turn the

knob* 90 page 151, fig. 121.

Note The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.

First-aid kit and fire extinguisher

The first-aid kit* is located in a storage box on the left side of the luggage

compartment.

The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet with

Velcro.

Note The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's

standard equipment.

The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.

Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should

purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the

first-aid kit has expired.

The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.

Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher

should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher

will inform you of the next date for checking.

Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-

tions in Accessories and spares page 219.

Luggage compartm

Stowing luggage

All luggage must be sec

Please observe the followi

well at all times:

Distribute the load as e

Place heavy objects as

as possible.

Secure luggage in the lu

on the fastening rings.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other injuries.

Loose objects in the lugg change the way the vehicle h

During sudden manoeuvr passenger compartment can

Always store objects in th able straps. This is especially

When you transport heav change in the centre of gravit

Please observe informati

Seats and storage compartments 153

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 122 from housings

its slot, in its rest position and pull

compartment should remain closed.

mpartment

partment by turning the knob* 90

compartment is freed from the pivot point

bjects on the rear shelf, because they will nts in case of sudden braking.

Fig. 123 Removing storage compartment

AB AA

Altea_EN.book Seite 153 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Caution Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating

element in the rear window and cause damage.

Note The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as

this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.

Rear shelf

Removing the shelf

Unhook the loops fi

Extract the cover from

outwards. The storage

To remove the storage co

Open the storage com

page 151, fig. 121.

Pull outwards until the

fig. 123.

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard o endanger the vehicle occupa

Fig. 122 Rear shelf

Seats and storage compartments154

be exceeded. See the chapter on Technical

r large objects on the roof, any change in the

to a change in the centre of gravity or an

st be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-

ust be used.

ith a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere

er system when opened.

Altea_EN.book Seite 154 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Caution Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.

An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not

correctly seated and it may be bent or damaged.

If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray.

Note Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment

cover, rear visibility is not reduced.

If the vehicle is fitted with a storage compartment*, it should only be used

to store the emergency triangles and light-weight articles.

Roof carrier*

Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:

For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT

should be used.

It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the

rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for

this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door

frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-

tion manual. Not following these instructions may damage the bodywork.

Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and

check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and

check them at regular intervals.

Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for

each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly

along the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire

roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should

the total weight of the vehicle

Data.

When transporting heavy o

normal vehicle behaviour due

increased wind resistance mu

able speed and driving style m

For those vehicles fitted w

with the load on the roof carri

Air conditioning 155

Safety Fir Technical Data

is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

ne has reached its operating temperature.

hed off automatically approximately 20 minutes

n also be switched off beforehand by pushing

vents strong odours in the outside air from

or example when passing through a tunnel or in

g. 124 Heating controls on the dash panel

Altea_EN.book Seite 155 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Air conditioning

Heating

Operating instructions

Using the controls fig. 124 and and the control you

can set the temperature, air distribution and the blower speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or

. When the function is activated, the display window in the

lower left of the button is lit.

Temperature

With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-

ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.

Maximum heat output, which

only available when the engi

Heated rear window

This function will be switc

after being switched on. It ca

the button

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode pre

entering the vehicle interior, f

queuing traffic .

Fi

A1 A4 A5

A2

A3

A1

A2

A3

Air conditioning156

Altea_EN.book Seite 156 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-

ment rather than the air from outside.

Air distribution

Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.

Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is

on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode

is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air

recirculation mode should not be connected.

Air distribution to the upper body

Air distribution to footwell

Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell

Blower

The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should

always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Note Please observe the general notes page 165.

A4

A5

Air conditioning 157

Safety Fir Technical Data

r window. The heating will be switched off auto-

20 minutes after switching on. It can also be

by pushing the button.

tion mode page 159

page 158

four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow

the lowest speed when driving slowly.

must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. ood visibility. Please familiarise yourself with heating and ventilation system, including the r the windscreens.

g. 125 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

Altea_EN.book Seite 157 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Climatic*

Control switches

The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works

when the engine is running and the blower is switched on.

Using the controls fig. 125 and and the control you

can set the temperature, air distribution and the blower speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,

or . When the function is activated, the display window in

the lower corner of the button is lit.

Temperature selector page 158

Button Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off

page 158

Button Heated rea

matically approximately

switched off beforehand

Button Air recircula

Air distribution control Blower switch. There are

should always be set at

WARNING

For road safety all windows This is essential to ensure g the correct operation of the anti-fog/defrost functions fo

Fi

A1 A5 A6

A2

A3 A4

A1

A2 AC

A3

A4

A5

A6

Air conditioning158

tioner using the button page 157,

lector anti-clockwise until the desired

ed.

to one of the settings 1-4.

. 126 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

Altea_EN.book Seite 158 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Note Please observe the general notes page 165.

Heating and cooling the interior

Interior heating

Turn the temperature selector fig. 126 clockwise to select

the required temperature.

Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.

Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration

desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),

(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and

footwell areas).

Interior cooling

Switch on the air condi

fig. 125 .

Turn the temperature se

cooling output is reach

Turn the blower switch

Fig

A1

AC

Air conditioning 159

Safety Fir Technical Data

ants and prevents misting of the windows when

igh.

cannot be switched on this may be caused by

.

f.

is below +3C.

m compressor has been temporarily switched

nt temperature is too high.

faulty.

le. Have the air conditioner checked by a quali-

e.

g. 127 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

Altea_EN.book Seite 159 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the

required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper

body), (to the footwell) and (to the windscreen and to the

footwell).

Heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,

but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

comfort for the vehicle occup

the ambient air humidity is h

If the air conditioning system

the following reasons:

The engine is not running

The blower is switched of

The outside temperature

The air conditioning syste

off because the engine coola

The air conditioner fuse is

Another fault in the vehic

fied workshop.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outsid

Fi

Air conditioning160

Altea_EN.book Seite 160 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Air recirculation mode page 159, fig. 127 prevents strong odours in

the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing

through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.

With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-

ment rather than the cold air from outside.

With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger

compartment rather than the ambient air.

If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Air conditioning 161

Safety Fir Technical Data

ted separately for the left and right sides of the

ction for the windscreen. The air drawn in from

ected at the windscreen. The air recirculation

l be switched off as soon as the defrost function

atures over 3C, the air conditioning system will

cally and the blower speed will be increased by

he air. The button is lit in yellow and the symbol

avigator display.

distribution

istribution

air distribution

g. 128 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls

Altea_EN.book Seite 161 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

2C-Climatronic*

Control switches

The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioner settings for the left and right.

The air conditioner controls the temperature when the engine is

running and the blower is switched on.

Turn the temperature control knobs fig. 128 in order to

adjust the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand

side respectively.

The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.

When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the

radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.

Press the button again to switch off the function.

The temperature can be adjus

vehicle interior.

Button defrost fun

outside the vehicle is dir

mode, if switched on, wil

is switched on. At temper

be switched on automati

one level in order to dry t

appears on the radio or n

Button Upward air

Button Central air d

Button Downward

Fi

A1

A2

A3

A4

Air conditioning162

ormation

limatronic system can be displayed

d navigation screen mounted at

Fig. 129 Navigation display with information about the Climatronic

Fig. 130 Radio display with information about Climatronic

Altea_EN.book Seite 162 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Button Manual air recirculation mode.

Button Heated rear window. The heating will be switched off auto-

matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may

be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the

symbol appears in the display.

Button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution

control page 163

button - Dual zone synchroniser

Button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 164

Blower control page 164

button Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system

on

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

Note Please observe the general notes page 165.

Viewing Climatronic inf

Information about the C

on the radio or radio an

factory.

A5

A6

A7 AUTO

A8 DUAL

A9 OFF

A10

A11 AC

Air conditioning 163

Safety Fir Technical Data

igher or lower depending on the ambient condi-

tant temperature. The temperature of the air

lower speed and the air distribution are regu-

em also considers the sunlight radiation, so

adjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost

fort for the vehicle occupants throughout the

off whenever an adjustment is made using the

n, air flow or or the air recirculation button

tinue to be regulated within the parameters

r.

es:

calculates the air flow for two people.

calculates the air flow for more than two

Altea_EN.book Seite 163 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has

been activated.

In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory

briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.

The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same

as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.

Automatic mode

In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution

are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is

attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.

The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right

sides of the vehicle interior.

Switching on automatic mode

Press the button page 161, fig. 128. AUTO High is

shown on the radio display (high fan speed).

Press the button again page 161, fig. 128. AUTO Low

is shown on the radio display (low fan speed).

Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:

When a temperature of 22C (72F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable

interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to

change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or

particular circumstances. The inside temperature can be set between +18C

(64F) and +26C (80F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual

temperature may be slightly h

tions.

Climatronic maintains a cons

supplied to the interior, the b

lated automatically. The syst

there is no need for manual re

always provides the best com

year.

Automatic mode is switched

buttons for the air distributio

. The temperature will con

manually selected by the use

Note There are two automatic mod

Automatic mode LO: This

Automatic mode HI: This

people.

AUTO

AUTO

Air conditioning164

0F) is selected, the display switches to HI In

maximum heating output and the temperature

reely using the control . Always have the

g to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the

to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.

using the buttons , and . It is also

me of the air vents separately.

system on and off

D lit), the heating, ventilation and air condi-

. 131 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls.

A10

Altea_EN.book Seite 164 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Manual mode

In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.

Switching on manual mode

To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 131 to

or press the air flow control . The selected function is

shown on the radio or navigator display.

Temperature

There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the

vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.

The inside temperature can be set between +18C (64F) and +26C (80F).

These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be

slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.

If a temperature below 18C (64F) is selected, the display switches to LO In

this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature

is not regulated.

If a temperature above 26C (8

this setting the system runs at

is not regulated.

Blower

The air flow may be adjusted f

blower running at a low settin

vehicle. Pushing the button

Air distribution

The air distribution is adjusted

possible to open and close so

Switching the air conditioning

When the button is on (LE

tioning system is on.

Fig

A1

A5 A10

AC

Air conditioning 165

Safety Fir Technical Data

e, the air recirculation increases the effective-

y heating the air inside the passenger compart-

outside.

res, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ystem by cooling the air inside the passenger

ambient air.

s on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

e is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

air recirculation mode should not be

cold air from the outside enters the vehicle ng system is switched off, the windows can , never leave the air recirculation mode (risk of accident).

ed particulate filter and active carbon filter)

purities in the outside air, including dust and

k with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter

vals specified in the Service Schedule.

maturely due to use in areas reaching very high

lter must be changed more frequently than

le.

Altea_EN.book Seite 165 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

When the button is off (LED off), the heating, ventilation and air condi-

tioning system is off.

When the button is off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning

system is switched off to save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regu-

late. The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the

outside temperature.

Driver and passenger temperature control

The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate

zones.

When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side

temperature 23C.

When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side

temperature 22C.

If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the

function is automatically activated.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells

from coming from the outside.

Press the button page 164, fig. 131 to switch air recir-

culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol

appears in the display .

Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from

entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in

a traffic jam.

With low temperatures outsid

ness of the heating system b

ment rather than the air from

With high ambient temperatu

ness of the air conditioning s

compartment rather than the

If the windscreen air output i

this remains active. When the

towards the windscreen mod

vated. For safety reasons, the

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no interior. If the air conditioni quickly mist over. Therefore switched on for a long time

General notes

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combin

serves as a barrier against im

pollen.

For the air conditioner to wor

must be replaced at the inter

If the filter loses efficiency pre

pollution levels, the pollen fi

stated in the Service Schedu

AC

AC

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

A2

Air conditioning166

front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and

cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the

s through the passenger compartment and is

r this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these

other objects.

es most effectively with the windows and the

. However, if the vehicle has been overheated

oled faster by opening the windows for a short

irculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the

a residue on the evaporator, producing a

he air conditioning at least once a month, to

nd prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling

rised Service Centre should be consulted to

Altea_EN.book Seite 166 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,

but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when

the ambient air humidity is high.

If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by

the following reasons:

The engine is not running.

The button is disconnected.

The outside temperature is below +3C.

The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched

off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.

The air conditioner fuse is faulty.

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a quali-

fied workshop.

Caution If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with button

to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special

tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a qualified work-

shop.

Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle

underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to

suspect a leak.

Keep the air intake slots in

leaves to ensure heating and

windows from misting over.

The air from the vents flow

extracted by slots designed fo

slots with items of clothing or

The air conditioner operat

sliding/tilting sunroof* closed

by sun, the air inside can be co

time.

Do not smoke while air rec

air conditioning system leaves

permanent unpleasant odour.

It is advisable to connect t

lubricate the system gaskets a

capacity is detected, an Autho

check the system.

AC

AC

Driving 167

Safety Fir Technical Data

o the correct position.

e steering column fig. 132 down

eel until the correct position is set

again firmly .

ring column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.

teering column should be adjusted only when

Fig. 133 Proper sitting position for driver

Altea_EN.book Seite 167 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving

Address

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely

adjusted to suit the driver.

Adjust the driver seat t

Push the lever under th

.

Adjust the steering wh

fig. 133.

Then push the lever up

WARNING

Incorrect use of the stee rect seating position can res

To avoid accidents, the s the vehicle is stationary.

Fig. 132 Adjusting the steering wheel position

Driving168

ramme (ESP)*

safer in certain situations.

mme (ESP) includes the electronic differential

l system (TCS), the brake assist system (BAS)

ogramme (TSP). The ESP function works

arning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS

lly when the engine is started.

annot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is

f.

hen in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.

ains,

Fig. 134 Detailed view of the centre console: ESP button

Altea_EN.book Seite 168 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 167, fig. 133. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.

If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi- cations are necessary.

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

Safety

Electronic Stability Prog

ESP helps make driving

The Electronic Stability Progra

lock (EDL), the traction contro

and the trailer stabilisation pr

together with the ABS. Both w

systems are faulty.

The ESP is started automatica

The ESP is always active, and c

only possible to switch TCS of

The TCS can be deactivated w

For example:

When driving with snow ch

WARNING (continued)

Driving 169

Safety Fir Technical Data

key

g lock

e ignition and the engine are OFF and the

te without the ignition key, turn the steering

dible sound. You should always lock the

e your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle

glow plug system on

sition and release it. If the key cannot be turned

osition to position , move the steering

ther until it is released.

Fig. 135 Ignition key positions

A0

A1

A0 A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 169 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for

example.

Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 193, Intelligent technology.

Ignition lock

Position of the ignition

Ignition switched off, steerin

In this position fig. 135 th

steering may get locked.

For the Steering lock to opera

wheel until it locks with an au

steering wheel when you leav

theft .

Switching the ignition or the

Turn the ignition key to this po

or it is difficult to turn from p

wheel from one side to the o

Driving170

ed again automatically as soon as you pull the

using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.

icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

ping the engine

tarted using a genuine SEAT key with

the neutral position and depress the

and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting position page 169.

y as soon as the engine starts; the starter

with the engine.

e, you may need to slightly press down the

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

ause for concern.

Altea_EN.book Seite 170 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Starting

The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components

with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.

Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to

position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents

possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse- quently resulting in an accident.

Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.

Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key

position ).

Electronic immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving

the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The immobiliser will be activat

key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started

Note A perfect operation of the veh

Starting and stop

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be s

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to

clutch pedal thoroughly

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Let go of the ignition ke

motor must not run on

After starting a very hot engin

accelerator.

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure has

This is quite normal, and no c

A2

A0

A2

Driving 171

Safety Fir Technical Data

started using a genuine SEAT key with

the neutral position and depress the

y and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting position.

position page 169, fig. 135 . The

light for engine pre-heating.

p turns off, turn the key to position to

t press the accelerator.

y as soon as the engine starts, the starter

wed to run on with the engine.

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

s built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

ause for concern.

the engine, see the page 276.

sel engine

rging of the battery, do not use any other major

e glow plugs are pre-heating.

e glow plug warning lamp page 80 goes out.

fuel tank has been completely run dry

pletely run dry, it may take longer than normal

e engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is

minate air first.

A1

A2

Altea_EN.book Seite 171 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after

10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,

the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 262, Fuses.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions in page 276, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to

clutch pedal thoroughl

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Turn the ignition key to

indicator lamp will

When the warning lam

start the engine. Do no

Let go of the ignition ke

motor must not be allo

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure ha

This is quite normal, and no c

If there are problems starting

Glow plug system for the die

To avoid unnecessary discha

electrical equipment while th

Start the engine as soon as th

Starting the engine after the

If the fuel tank has been com

(up to one minute) to start th

because the system must eli

Driving172

, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10

t the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant

the heat accumulated in the engine compart-

xposure to solar radiation.

ff until the vehicle is completely stationary.

ly when the engine is running. With the ength is needed to brake. As normal brake ed, risk of accidents and serious injury may

mmediately blocked once the key is removed hicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.

hard for a long period, the engine could over-

isk of engine damage. For this reason, you

rox. 2 minutes before you switch it off.

Altea_EN.book Seite 172 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions in page 276, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle.

Turn the ignition key to position page 169, fig. 135 .

After switching the engine off

minutes. It is also possible tha

temperature increases due to

ment or due to its prolonged e

WARNING

Never switch the engine o

The brake servo works on engine switched off, more str operation cannot be perform exist.

The steering lock can be i from the ignition lock. The ve

Caution If the engine has been driven

heat when it is switched off. R

should idle the engine for app

A0

Driving 173

Safety Fir Technical Data

l to LPG

tomatically switches from petrol to LPG

tions are met:

e tank.

hicle coolant is above 30C.

g is above 1200 rpm.

ssed and the warning light ON is flashing or

en it was switched off.

et, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON

petrol

itches from LPG to petrol in the following cases:

d.

g. 136 Centre console: gas system control warning hts and switch.

A3

Altea_EN.book Seite 173 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving with LPG*

switch.

Warning light OFF Running on petrol

Warning light ON Running on LPG

Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able to run on either LPG or petrol.

The LPG tank page 222, Refuelling with LPG is in the spare wheel well

.

It is possible to change from LPG to petrol while the engine is running, even

if the vehicle is moving, by pressing the button fig. 136 . The

selected operating mode is shown by the lights OFF (running on petrol)

and ON (running on LPG).

Starting the engine

The engine is always started with petrol, even when LPG was being used

when it was switched off.

Automatic switch from petro

After checking, the system au

provided the following condi

There is enough LPG in th

The temperature of the ve

Engine speed while drivin

The button is pre

the engine was using LPG wh

When these conditions are m

lamp is lit .

Automatic switch from LPG to

The system automatically sw

When the engine is starte

If the LPG tank is empty.

Fi lig

A1 GAS

A2

A3

GAS A1

A2

A3

GAS A1

A3

Driving174

are made, especially when the outside temper-

nd to run on petrol more often than on LPG.

empty before the LPG tank.

n*

on

ps the engine when the vehicle is

matically when required.

pped, put it in neutral and release the

e will stop.

is pressed, the engine starts again.

creen displays information about the

function page 176, fig. 138.

s

e buckled.

closed.

rating temperature

e straight.

t ground.

reverse.

cted.

Altea_EN.book Seite 174 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

If there is a fault in the LPG system.

At very low temperatures below minus 10C.

Manual switch from petrol to LPG

Press the GAS button to switch modes. When the necessary conditions are

met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON lamp is lit. If the ON

lamp flashes, the following conditions have not been met:

There is enough LPG in the tank.

The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30C.

Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.

When these conditions are met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON

lamp is lit .

Manual switch from LPG to petrol

Press the button to switch modes. When the OFF lamp is lit, the

vehicle is running on petrol.

Running on petrol

Run the engine with petrol for short journeys at regular intervals to avoid

problems in the petrol system.

WARNING

LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe burns and other injury.

Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.

When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage), make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.

Note If frequent short journeys

ature is low, the vehicle will te

Therefore, the petrol tank may

Start-Stop functio

Description and operati

The Start-Stop function sto

stopped and starts it auto

When the vehicle is sto

clutch pedal. The engin

When the clutch pedal

The instrument panel s

status of the Start-Stop

Start-Stop function condition

The driver seat belt must b

The engine hood must be

The engine must be at ope

The steering wheel must b

The vehicle must be on fla

The vehicle must not be in

A trailer must not be conne

A1

A3

A3

A3

GAS A1 A2

Driving 175

Safety Fir Technical Data

ove with the engine off for any reason. You hicle. This could cause an accident and serious

t work when the engine is not running. You vehicle.

does not work when the engine is not running. difficult to turn the steering wheel.

p system when driving through water (fording

-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when the

ust be pressed.

he Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the

e Start-Stop indicator dimmed.

ed by rotating the steering wheel three times,

Altea_EN.book Seite 175 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the

convenience limits (button page 164, fig. 131 should be selected).

The windscreen de-mist function must be off.

If not, it requires an increase in airflow page 164, fig. 131 for more

than three presses.

Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO must not be set.

The driver door must be closed.

The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel

engines.

The battery charge must not be low for the next start.

The battery temperature must be between -1C and 55C.

The parking assistant, Park Assist* must not be activated.

Interrupting the Start-Stop function

In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and the

engine will automatically start:

The vehicle is moving.

The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.

The battery has been discharged excessively.

The Start-Stop System has been manually deactivated.

The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.

The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the convenience

limits (button page 164, fig. 131 should be selected).

If in an increase in airflow page 164, fig. 131 is required for more

than three presses.

Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO, is selected.

The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.

The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.

If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfilled.

WARNING

Never allow the vehicle to m could lose control of your ve injury.

The brake servo does no need more force to stop the

Power assisted steering That is why it is much more

Disconnect the Start/Sto streams, etc.).

Note For vehicles with the Start

engine is started, the clutch m

When the conditions for t

instrument panel displays th

The vehicle can be restart

that is, more than 270.

AC A11

A10

AC A11

A10

Driving176

by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed on

the dash panel; the display of indications on

Fig. 138 Display on the instrument panel during Start-Stop function opera- tion.

Altea_EN.book Seite 176 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Deactivating and activating the Start-Stop function

Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is

automatically switched on.

Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function

Press the fig. 137 located in the centre console. When the

Start-Stop function is deactivated, the pushbutton indicator

lights.

If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts

immediately.

Manually activating the Start-Stop function

Press the fig. 137 located in the centre console. The indi-

cator on the button will go out.

Driver messages

When the engine is turned off

the instrument panel.

Note There are different versions of

the screen may differ.

Fig. 137 The Start-Stop function button.

AA

AA

Driving 177

Safety Fir Technical Data

r

tationary with the engine idling. Press the

y.

to neutral and push the lever downwards.

the left, and then into the reverse position

er.

engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When

fore engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds

thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.

en the reverse gear is selected and the ignition

ing, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a tch released.

gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-

he gear lever while driving. The pressure of your

wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

should always depress the clutch fully to avoid

ge.

e clutch on hills. This causes premature wear

Altea_EN.book Seite 177 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbox

Engaging the reverse gea

The vehicle should be s

clutch down thoroughl

Place the gear lever in

Slide the gear lever to

shown on the gear lev

The reverse gear can only be

the engine is running and be

with the clutch pressed down

The reverse lights light up wh

is on.

WARNING

When the engine is runn gear is engaged and the clu

Never select the reverse dent.

Note Do not rest your hand on t

hand could cause premature

When changing gear, you

unnecessary wear and dama

Do not hold the car on th

and damage to the clutch.

Fig. 139 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox

Fig. 140 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

Driving178

/ DSG automatic gearbox has three

gramme

a higher gear earlier rather than remain

to position D to drive forwards

to position R to reverse. This position is

es for reversing.

mme

ion S.

me, S, the programme is designed for a sports

ich changes up at higher engine speeds to use

Fig. 142 Programme selection

Altea_EN.book Seite 178 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Automatic gearbox*/DSG automatic gearbox

Selector lever positions

Selector lever positions indicated on the cover

P Parking position (lever locked).

R Reverse position.

N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral

position for manual gearboxes).

D Drive position (economic driving programme).

S Sports driving position.

+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of

a manual gearbox).

Driving programmes

The automatic gearbox

programmes.

Selecting the economy pro

This programme selects

in a lower gear.

Put the selector lever in

Put the selector lever in

shared by all programm

Selecting the sport progra

Move the lever to posit

If you select the sport program

mode, that is, a programme wh

Fig. 141 Centre console: gear lever for automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox

Driving 179

Safety Fir Technical Data

brake pedal, at the same time press the

lever.

en the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less

s, the lock is automatically released in position

(e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the

N more than one second then it is locked. With

is prevented passing from P and N to any other

e brake pedal.

t in the position P in order to remove the key.

tic gearbox* / DSG automatic

ears are automatically engaged.

Fig. 144 Driving

Altea_EN.book Seite 179 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on

the motorway or in the city.

Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)

This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.

This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the

steering wheel controls when this option is fitted page 181.

Selector lever locking

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged

inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.

Releasing the selector lever lock

Start the vehicle.

Press and release the

button on the selector

The lock is only activated wh

than 5 km/h. At higher speed

N.

For rapid changes of position

lever remains in the position

the automatic lock, the lever

gear without first pressing th

The selector lever must be pu

Driving with an automa gearbox

The drive and reverse g

Fig. 143 Deactivating the lock

Driving180

cases, using the brake pedal to prevent

hicle using another forward gear (engine

, release the brake and accelerate.

ower the gear must be for effective engine

ar is used on a very steep gradient, the engine

vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed

he gearbox changes to the next highest gear.

ove the selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to

ave the vehicle while the engine is running or ny reason you must leave the vehicle with the ndbrake and move the selector lever to posi-

ng and the positions D, S or R are selected, it cle with the brake pedal because the vehicle

anging the position of the gear lever (risk of

r be moved into the positions R or P while

gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic gear.

Altea_EN.book Seite 180 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Driving

Press and hold the foot brake.

Press on the button on the selector lever knob (on the left,

page 179, fig. 144.

Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).

Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to

engage, a light jerk will be felt.

Release the brake and accelerate.

Short stop

Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for

example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be

put into the positions P or N for this.

Do not press the accelerator.

Parking the vehicle

Press the brake pedal and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to

the position P and release the button.

Driving slowly

Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to

put the lever into Tiptronic mode.

Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.

Hill stop

Hold the vehicle, in all

rolling back.

Do not try to slow the ve

braking).

Descending gradients

With the gear engaged

The steeper the gradient the l

braking. For example, if 3rd ge

braking is insufficient and the

does not become excessive, t

Depress the brake pedal and m

return to 3rd gear.

WARNING

The driver should never le with any gear selected. If for a engine running, apply the ha tion P.

When the engine is runni is necessary to hold the vehi will creep at a low speed.

Never accelerate while ch an accident).

The gear lever must neve moving (risk of an accident).

Before descending a steep programme to select a lower

Driving 181

Safety Fir Technical Data

nic* mode*

lows the driver to select gears manu-

Fig. 145 Changing gear with Tiptronic

Fig. 146 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox

Altea_EN.book Seite 181 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.

The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.

Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced.

Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,

even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.

Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.

If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in

position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be

lubricated.

Changing gear in Tiptro

The Tiptronic system al

ally

WARNING (continued)

Driving182

or sport programme using the steering wheel

81, fig. 146 are used in the normal or sport

es temporarily to Tiptronic mode. To exit

the right paddle lever towards the

ely one second. You will also leave Tiptronic

not moved for a certain time.

e steering wheel can operate with the gear

the vehicle in motion.

designed to give maximum accelera-

wn thoroughly, the gearbox automatically

speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to

vehicle maximum acceleration.

gear until the engine reaches the maximum

the gear.

vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road ry.

en using the kickdown features on slippery eleration, the vehicle could lose traction and

+ OFF

Altea_EN.book Seite 182 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

General information about driving in Tiptronic mode

Changing gear with the gear lever

Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter

the Tiptronic gate page 181, fig. 145.

Press the gear lever forwards page 181, fig. 145 to select

a higher gear.

Press the gear lever back page 181, fig. 145 to select a

lower gear.

Changing gear with the steering wheel levers

Press the right paddle lever (+OFF) towards the steering

wheel to change up page 181, fig. 146.

Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change

down page 181, fig. 146.

Using the paddle levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving

mode regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.

General information about driving in Tiptronic mode

When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox goes

into a higher gear a little before the engine reaches its maximum permitted

revolutions.

If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox

will only change down when the engine cannot go over its maximum

permitted revolutions.

If the Tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic

gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox is in 3rd gear in gear lever position D, the

Tiptronic will then also be in 3rd gear.

Changing gears in the normal paddle levers

If the paddle levers page 1

programme, the system switch

Tiptronic mode again, press

steering wheel for approximat

mode if the paddle levers are

Note The gearbox controls on th

lever in any position and with

Kickdown feature

The kickdown feature is

tion.

If you press the accelerator do

changes down, depending on

take full advantage of give the

The gearbox does not change

determined engine speed for

WARNING

You could lose control of the surfaces. Risk of serious inju

Be particularly careful wh road surfaces. With a fast acc skid.

A+

A

A+

A

Driving 183

Safety Fir Technical Data

er up firmly fig. 147.

ly and press the release knob in the direc-

147 and guide the handbrake lever down

as far as it will go in order to prevent you from

pplied by mistake .

lights up when the handbrake is applied

. The warning turns off when the handbrake is

h with the handbrake on, the following

nstrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,

to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The ably longer, because braking is only applied to dent!

sed, this will cause rear brakes overheating, n of the brake system and could lead to an acci- ature wear on the rear brake pads.

before you leave the vehicle. The first gear

Altea_EN.book Seite 183 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

You should use the kickdown feature only when traffic and weather conditions allow it to be used safely.

Handbrake

Using the handbrake

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the

vehicle from accidentally rolling away.

Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when

you park.

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake lev

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slight

tion of the arrow fig.

fully .

Always apply the handbrake

driving with the handbrake a

The handbrake warning lamp

and the ignition switched on

released.

If you drive faster than 6 km/

message* will appear on the i

an warning buzzer is given.

WARNING

Never use the handbrake braking distance is consider the rear wheels. Risk of acci

If it is only partially relea which can impair the functio dent. This also causes prem

Caution Always apply the handbrake

should also be selected.

WARNING (continued)

Fig. 147 Handbrake between the front seats

Driving184

exhaust system could ignite inflammable low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

ants to remain in the vehicle when it is e to open the vehicle from the inside, and vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an l delay assistance to occupants.

e in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in sing the handbrake or the gear lever.

nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold e fatal.

luded in vehicles with ESP.

g uphill.

conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed

he system gets activated on engaging gear.

he brake pedal, the braking force is maintained

e vehicle from moving backward when putting

time is enough to start the vehicle with ease.

reversing uphill.

icle immediately after taking your foot off the start to roll back under certain conditions. se the hand brake immediately.

Altea_EN.book Seite 184 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the

vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:

Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

Apply the handbrake.

The first gear should also be selected.

Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition lock.

Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.

Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle

.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started

to roll.

If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they

point towards the kerb.

If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they

point away from the kerb.

Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and

engaging first gear.

WARNING

Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.

Never park where the hot materials, such as dry grass,

Never allow vehicle occup locked. They would be unabl could become trapped in the emergency, locked doors wil

Never leave children alon motion, for example, by relea

Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can b

Hill-start aid*

This function is only inc

This device helps when startin

These are the basic operation

down and vehicle in neutral. T

After removing your foot from t

for a few seconds to prevent th

into gear. This short space of

This system also works when

WARNING

If you do not start the veh brake pedal, the vehicle may Depress the brake pedal or u

WARNING (continued)

Driving 185

Safety Fir Technical Data

Description

n acoustic parking aid.

r bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,

ignals (beeps). The measuring range of the

ith increasing frequency as you approach the

less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

ill sound continuously. Do not drive on!

eps will be gradually reduced after about 4

s at a constant distance from a detected

e permanent acoustic signal).

n automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

dgement tone.

eplacement for driver awareness. The driver is afe parking and other manoeuvres.

pots in which obstacles are not registered. ildren and animals because the system will not pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-

on the area around the vehicle and make full

e 0,60

ntre 1,60

Altea_EN.book Seite 185 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down for a few seconds before starting off.

Note The Official Service or a specialist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is

equipped with this system.

Parking aid acoustic system*

General notes

Various systems are available to help you when parking or manoeuvring in

tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehicle.

The SEAT Parking System* gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-

cles behind your car.

When you are parking, the SEAT Parking System Plus* warns you acoustically

and optically21) about obstacles in front of and behind the vehicle.

Note To ensure the acoustic parking aid works properly, the sensors must be kept

clean and free of snow and ice.

SEAT Parking System:

The Parking System is a

Sensors are located in the rea

you are alerted by acoustic s

sensors starts at about:

The acoustic signals sound w

obstacle. When the vehicle is

obstacle, the warning tone w

The volume of the warning be

seconds if the vehicle remain

obstacle (it does not affect th

The parking aid is switched o

You will hear a brief acknowle

WARNING

The parking aid is not a r personally responsible for s

The sensors have blind s Always look out for small ch always detect them. Always dents.

Always keep a close eye use of the rear view mirrors.

21) Vehicles with a navigation system.

WARNING (continued)

Rear Sid

Ce

Driving186

eps will be gradually reduced after about 4

at a constant distance from a detected

permanent acoustic signal).

igator

the centre console fig. 148 or on the

will hear a brief acknowledgement tone

tch will light up.

an 10 km/h, or

Fig. 148 Centre console: Switch for parking aid

Altea_EN.book Seite 186 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Caution Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be

registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give

any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.

Note Please refer to the notes on towing page 187.

SEAT Parking System Plus*: Description

The parking system plus is an acoustic and optical parking

aid.

Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect

an obstacle, you are alerted by acoustic and optical signals. The measuring

range of the sensors starts at about:

The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the

obstacle. When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-

ately!

The volume of the warning be

seconds if the vehicle remains

obstacle (it does not affect the

Enabling/Disabling

Enabling

Connects the radio nav

Press the switch on

gear selector gate. You

and the LED on the swi

Disabling

Drive forwards faster th

Press the switch or

Front Side 0,90

Centre 1,20

Rear Side 0,60

Centre 1,60

Driving 187

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing aid sensors are not enabled when you select

ch . This function may not be guaranteed on

actory fitted. This results in the following restric-

ning. The system will still give a warning when

driving forwards. The optical display changes to

w seconds and the LED on the switch * starts

the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.

n Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work-

fore you switch off the ignition, it will only be

on the switch the next time you switch on

Altea_EN.book Seite 187 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Switch the ignition off.

Segments in the optical display

Some colour segments in front and behind and an acoustic signal enable the

driver to assess the distance with respect to an obstacle. The amber colour

segments combined with a discontinuous beep indicate the presence of an

obstacle. As the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle, the colour of the segment

changes to red and the acoustic signal beeps continuously. When the penul-

timate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the

collision zone. Stop moving immediately! .

WARNING

The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be

registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give

any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.

Note Please refer to the notes on towing page 187.

There is a slight delay in the picture display.

Towing bracket

In towing mode, the rear park

reverse gear or press the swit

towing brackets that are not f

tions:

SEAT Parking System*

No warning is given

SEAT Parking System Plus:*

There is no rear distance war

obstacles are detected while

towing mode.

Fault messages

If you hear a long beep for a fe

flashing when you switch on

Please refer the problem to a

shop.

Note If the fault is not corrected be

indicated by the flashing LED

the parking aid.

Driving188

ntrol system on and off

149 to the left to ON.

to the right to OFF or turn the ignition

stationary.

nd a speed is programmed, the indicator on

witched off, the symbol is switched off. The

ed off when the 1st gear is selected.*

n

Fig. 149 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AB

AB

Altea_EN.book Seite 188 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Cruise control* (GRA)

Description

The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in

the range of 30 km/h to 180 km/h.

Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-

erator.

WARNING

It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible to drive at constant speed.

Do not use the cruise control system when driving in dense traffic, on roads with lots of bends or on roads with poor conditions (with ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as this could cause an accident.

Always switch the cruise control system off after using it in order to avoid an involuntary use.

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.

Note The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending down-

hill. The vehicle will accelerate due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle.

Switching the cruise co

Switching on the system

Push the switch fig.

Switching off the system

Either push the switch

off when the vehicle is

When the cruise control is on a

the instrument panel is lit.22)

If the cruise control system is s

system will also be fully switch

22) Depending on the model versio

Driving 189

Safety Fir Technical Data

d without touching the accelerator or

S/+ of the rocker switch fig. 151 to

e vehicle will continue to accelerate as

ocker switch pressed. When you release

eed is stored.

T/ of the rocker switch to reduce the

automatically reduce its speed for as long

pressed. When you release the switch, the

Fig. 151 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

AA

Altea_EN.book Seite 189 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Setting speed*

Press the lower part SET/- of the rocker switch fig. 150

once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.

When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held

constant.

Adjusting set speed*

The speed can be altere

the brake.

Setting a higher speed

Press the upper part RE increase the speed. Th

long as you keep the r

the switch, the new sp

Setting a lower speed

Press the lower part SE speed. The vehicle will

as you keep the switch

new speed is stored.

Fig. 150 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

Driving190

ssed,

d to over 180 km/h,

d.

d to the position CANCEL without reaching

CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is

ial position.

elease the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the

km/h and press once on the upper part of the

2 .

peed which is too high for the current road, Risk of accident.

ntrol system*

AA

Fig. 153 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

Altea_EN.book Seite 190 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the

system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,

however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored

speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.

Cruise control is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the brake

pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part of the

rocker switch RES/+ page 189, fig. 151 .

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.

Switching off the system temporarily*

The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:

if the brake pedal is depressed,

if the clutch pedal is depre

if the vehicle is accelerate

when the ESP or TCS is use

when the lever is move

the OFF position. Once the

released and returns to its init

To resume the cruise control, r

vehicle speed to less than 180

rocker switch RES/+ fig. 15

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set s traffic or weather conditions.

Turning off the cruise co

AA

Fig. 152 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AB

Driving 191

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 191 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to

the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition

off.

Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox

To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in one

of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the

ignition turned off.

AB

Altea_EN.book Seite 192 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Intelligent technology 193

Safety Fir Technical Data

AS)*

(BAS) function is only included in

s brake in time, but not with maximum force.

long braking distances.

venes when you press the brake pedal very

sist system registers an emergency situation. It

e full brake pressure so that the ABS can be acti-

ently, thus reducing the braking distance.

n the brake pedal. The brake assist system

soon as you release the brake.

nly and continuously at a speed of more than 80

several times per second to warn vehicles

e braking, the hazard warning lights will come

hicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-

arts to move again.

gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist

Altea_EN.book Seite 193 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Practical tips

Intelligent technology

Brakes

Brake servo

The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works

only when the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has

to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to

make up for the lack of servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.

Brake assist system (B

The Brake Assist System

vehicles with ESP.

In an emergency, most driver

This results in unnecessarily

The brake assist system inter

quickly because the brake as

then very quickly builds up th

vated more quickly and effici

Do not reduce the pressure o

switches off automatically as

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle is braked sudde

km/h, the brake light flashes

driving behind. If you continu

on automatically when the ve

matically when the vehicle st

WARNING

The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.

Intelligent technology194

rily guarantee shorter braking distances in all

ce could even be longer if you brake on gravel

ippery surface.

m cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is

d wheels under braking), you should reduce e road and traffic conditions. Do not let the ou into taking any risks when driving.

is also determined by the tyres fitted

es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS

(TCS)

em prevents the drive wheels from

s accelerating.

he traction control system during acceleration

help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel

uring acceleration. The system works in the

tion with ABS. If a malfunction occurs in the

erative.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

tically when the engine is started. If necessary,

hing the button on the centre console.

Altea_EN.book Seite 194 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking

during braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active

safety system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is

close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.

The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or

more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-

vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed

so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is

retained as the wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessa

conditions. The braking distan

or on fresh snow covering a sl

WARNING

The anti-lock brake syste and wet roads are dangerous working (to counteract locke speed immediately to suit th extra safety features tempt y

The effectiveness of ABS page 244.

If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.

Traction control system

The traction control syst

spinning when the car i

Description and operation of t (TCS)

TCS reduces engine power to

drive vehicles losing traction d

entire speed range in conjunc

ABS, the TCS will also be inop

TCS helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The TCS is switched on automa

it may be turned on or off pus

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 195

Safety Fir Technical Data

eshaft differential mechanism allows the outer

ed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel

heel) receives less drive torque than the inner

certain situations the torque delivered to the

ing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the

er drive torque than it could transmit. This

ral grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer

tory.

signals, the XDS system is able to detect and

kes the inner wheel, thereby counteracting the

eel. This means that the driver's desired trajec-

ombination with the ESP and is always active,

ol, TCS, is disconnected.

ty Programme (ESP)*

Programme increases the vehicle's

amme helps reduce the danger of skidding.

amme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and endations.

Altea_EN.book Seite 195 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally

be left switched on at all times. Only in exceptional circumstances, when the

slipping of the wheels is required, should it be disconnected, for example

With compact temporary spare wheel.

When using the snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.

The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.

WARNING

It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be

fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the ABS and TCS.

XDS*

Driveshaft differential

When taking a bend, the driv

wheel to turn at a higher spe

that is turning faster (outer w

wheel. This may mean that in

inner wheel is too high, caus

outer wheel is receiving a low

causes an overall loss of late

or lengthening of the trajec

By using the ESP sensors and

correct this effect.

Through the ESP, the XDS bra

excess drive torque in this wh

tory is much more precise,

The XDS system operates in c

even when the traction contr

Electronic Stabili

General notes

The Electronic Stability

stability on the road.

The Electronic Stability Progr

The Electronic Stability Progr

Steering manoeuvre recomm

OFF

Intelligent technology196

functions correctly, all four wheels must be

differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

gine power when this is not desired.

e (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

d TCS.

(ABS)

vents the wheels locking during braking

ck (EDL)*

al lock helps prevent the loss of trac-

driven wheels starts spinning.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

olutions of the drive wheels using the ABS

lt the warning lamp for ABS lights up)

ely 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-

n wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by

side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the

nd distributing more driving force to the other

al.

Altea_EN.book Seite 196 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*

ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the

changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them

with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being

maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-

sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable

condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front

wheel on the outside of the turn.

Steering manoeuvre recommendations

This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids

the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in

case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend

to destabilize its trajectory to the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP

recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering

manoeuvre from the power steering.

This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in

critical situations.

The vehicle does not steer itself with this function, the driver has full control

of the vehicle at all times.

WARNING

It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that ESP

fitted with the same tyres. Any

cause the system to reduce en

Modifications to the vehicl

gear or any components affec

ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP an

Anti-lock brake system

The anti-lock brake system pre

page 194.

Electronic differential lo

The electronic differenti

tion caused if one of the

EDL helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The system will control the rev

sensors (in case of an EDL fau

page 81.

At speeds of up to approximat

ences in the speed of the drive

a slippery road surface on one

wheel which has lost traction a

driven wheel via the differenti

Intelligent technology 197

Safety Fir Technical Data

els, the engine power is distributed to

erates completely automatically. The propul-

ng the four wheels and adapted to the driving

.

ly designed to complement the superior engine

s the car exceptional handling and performance

roads and in more difficult conditions, such as

your car will have plenty of traction in winter

ndard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend

tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when

pected, mainly because this will give a better

are mandatory, this also applies to cars with all-

ive, all four tyres must have the same rolling

, you should always adjust your speed to suit e extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.

Altea_EN.book Seite 197 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to

function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that

the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

WARNING

When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.

Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the EDL page 219.

The traction control system (TCS)

The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the

car is accelerating page 194.

All-wheel drive*

On all-wheel drive mod

all four wheels

General notes

The all-wheel drive system op

sion force is distributed amo

style and the road conditions

The all-wheel drive is special

power. This combination give

capabilities, both on normal

snow and ice.

Winter tyres

Thanks to its all-wheel drive,

conditions, even with the sta

that winter tyres or all-season

winter road conditions are ex

braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains

wheel drive.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with all-wheel dr

circumference page 249.

WARNING

Even with all-wheel drive the conditions. Do not let th any risks when driving. Failu

Intelligent technology198

m/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake

ds the brake discs for a few seconds. This

e driver - at regular intervals and requires a

brakes when driving on wet roads.

n heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving

effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter

ads. The brakes should be dried by pressing

g effect.

s can also be temporarily reduced if the car is

out using the brakes when there is a lot of salt

se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads

.

irt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion

is used infrequently, or if you only drive low

akes very much.

uently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is

and disks by braking firmly a few times from a

.

d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that

s failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-

ault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be

on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-

brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.

red electronically.

Altea_EN.book Seite 198 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. Vehicle behaviour is no different from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on icy or slippery roads just because the car still has good acceleration in these conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aqua- plane and lose contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed when aquaplaning begins to warn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive car. For this reason and for that mentioned above, always choose a driving speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Brakes

What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km

they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be

compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-

loading the brakes during run-in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and

the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for

instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts

and stops.

Wet roads; road salt

When the velocity is over 80 k

system moves the pads towar

occurs - without warning to th

more rapid response from the

In certain conditions, such as i

through water, the full braking

by ice) on the discs and brake p

the pedal to restore full brakin

The effectiveness of the brake

driven for some distance with

on the road in winter. In this ca

has to wear off before braking

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for d

to form on the discs if the car

mileages without using the br

If the brakes are not used freq

advisable to clean off the pads

moderately high speed

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel shoul

one of the two brake circuits ha

ified workshop and have the f

prepared to use more pressure

ping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the

The brake fluid level is monito

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 199

Safety Fir Technical Data

ronic*)

ists the driver when turning the

e engine running).

e driver by reducing the force needed to turn the

ed with servotronic* power steering the degree

ted electronically according to road speed.

on working even if the servotronic* device fails.

ce will, however, no longer adapt to different

lating system is not working properly, this is

the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance

will be required than usual. The fault should be

shop as soon as possible.

ork if the engine is off. In this case the steering

rning limit when the car is stationary, this will

e power steering system. Turning the steering

d on the system, which causes noise. It will also

e engine.

do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for

wise, there is a risk of damaging the power

ld fail at any time or the engine is switched off

ed), the car can still be steered. However, more

the steering wheel.

malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-

ssible.

Altea_EN.book Seite 199 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Brake servo

The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The

brake servo works only when the engine is running.

WARNING

When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users. Risk of accident.

Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do

not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-

ping distances and greater wear.

Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed

and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear position if

your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and

prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is

better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle

has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder

to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or

wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not

obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.

Power steering (servot

The power steering ass

steering wheel (with th

The power steering assists th

steering wheel. In cars equipp

of power assistance is regula

The power steering will keep

The degree of power assistan

speeds. If the electronic regu

most noticeable when turning

when parking) more effort

corrected by a qualified work

The power steering does not w

wheel is very hard to turn.

If the steering is held at its tu

place an excessive load on th

wheel to its limit places a loa

reduce the idling speed of th

Caution When the engine is running,

more than 15 seconds. Other

steering.

Note If the power steering shou

(for instance when being tow

effort will be required to turn

If the system is leaking or

fied workshop as soon as po

Intelligent technology200

Altea_EN.book Seite 200 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

The power steering requires a special hydraulic fluid. The container is

located in the engine compartment (front left). The correct fluid level in the

reservoir is important for the power steering to function properly. The

hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.

Driving and the environment 201

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing distance

braking distance are influenced by

oad conditions.

epends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate

ends to a great extent on the conditions under

and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often

rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we

e thickness of your brake pads checked by an

re frequently than recommended in the Service

for example, after crossing areas of water, in

ashing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-

et or even frozen (in winter): The brakes should

dal to restore full braking effect.

d faults in the brake system increase the risk

run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.

n, or if you are driving on roads which have ng power may set in later than normal.

s are excessively used, they will overheat. teep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and ar (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if

Altea_EN.book Seite 201 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1500 km.

Up to 1000 kilometres

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 km

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed

or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is

greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,

reduced.

Braking effect and brak

The braking effect and

driving situations and r

The efficiency of the brakes d

of wear of the brake pads dep

which the vehicle is operated

drive in town traffic, drive sho

recommend that you have th

Authorised Service Centre mo

Schedule.

If you drive with wet brakes,

heavy rainfall or even after w

ened as the brake discs are w

be dried by pressing the pe

WARNING

Longer braking distances an of accidents.

New brake pads must be during the first 400 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad

If brakes are wet or froze been gritted with salt, braki

On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down a long s change down into a lower ge

Driving and the environment202

start it, use jump leads if necessary

running or loss of power when the vehicle is

iately and have the vehicle inspected at the

general, the exhaust gas warning lamp will

ribed symptoms occur page 77. If this

er the exhaust system and escape into the envi-

ter can also be damaged by overheating.

es very high temperatures! Fire hazard!

alytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.

nderseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the erter or the heat shields on the exhaust

ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.

because the irregularity of the fuel supply may

allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust

erheating and damage the catalytic converter.

vironment ol system is working perfectly, there may be a

ust gas under some conditions. This depends

fuel used. Quite often the problem can be

r brand of fuel.

Altea_EN.book Seite 202 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.

Never let the brakes slip by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant page 219, Technical modifications instructions.

If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Exhaust gas purification system

Catalytic converter*

To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter

Always use unleaded petrol.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil

page 232, Topping up engine oil .

Never tow the vehicle to

page 276.

If you notice misfiring, uneven

moving, reduce speed immed

nearest qualified workshop. In

light up when any of the desc

happens, unburnt fuel can ent

ronment. The catalytic conver

WARNING

The catalytic converter reach

Never park where the cat dry grass or inflammable ma

Do not apply additional u exhaust pipes, catalytic conv system. These materials cou

Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank

cause ignition problems. This

system, which could cause ov

For the sake of the en Even when the emission contr

smell of sulphur from the exha

on the sulphur content of the

solved by changing to anothe

WARNING (continued)

Driving and the environment 203

Safety Fir Technical Data

nvironmentally friendly

nmentally friendly driving

ntal pollution and wear to the engine, brakes

rt on your driving style. By adopting an econom-

ting the traffic situation ahead, you can easily

0-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce

are listed below.

situation

n accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-

ften and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,

r engaged, for example, if you see a red light

ieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of

and fuel consumption are reduced to zero

).

ergy

l is to change up quickly through the gears.

pm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary

first to second gear as quickly as possible. We

ossible, you change to a higher gear upon

te in moderation and avoid the kick-down (full

Altea_EN.book Seite 203 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced

by burning diesel.

The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas

system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving

conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short

trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for

the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. See section on

Warning Lamps.

WARNING

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Caution Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any circumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel may cause damage

to the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the

diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will

not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.

Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur content may significantly reduce the

working life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Authorised Service Centre will

be able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.

Economical and e driving

Economical and enviro

Fuel consumption, environme

and tyres depends in large pa

ical driving style and anticipa

reduce fuel consumption by 1

pollution while saving money

Drive anticipating the traffic

A vehicle uses most fuel whe

tion, you have to brake less o

let the vehicle roll with a gea ahead. The braking effect ach

brakes and tyres; emissions

(disconnection due to inertia

Change gear early to save en

An effective way of saving fue

Running the engine at high r

amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: Change from

recommend that, whenever p

reaching 2,000 rpm.

Automatic gearbox: Accelera

throttle) position.

Driving and the environment204

eater rolling resistance, under-inflation also

irs handling.

ays be checked when the tyres are cold.

r round: they will increase fuel consumption by

put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth

tment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-

orted.

ce for the sake of convenience, even when it is

of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%

tra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier

ator, which produces electricity. With the need

n is also increased. Because of this, always

hen you do not need them. Examples of equip-

ty are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window

ess

top priority in the design, choice of materials

eat.

cal recycling

signed for ease of dismantling

cilitate dismantling

ade materials

Altea_EN.book Seite 204 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel

consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at

higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level

crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only

30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the

engine.

The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling

speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high

during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately

after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you

will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced

engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum

reliability and an enhanced resale value.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and

the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine

does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having

driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding

short trips wherever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the

tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by

as much as 5 %. Due to the gr

increases tyre wear and impa

The tyre pressures should alw

Do not use winter tyres all yea

up to 10 %.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilo of extra weight will

checking the luggage compar

essary loads are being transp

A roof carrier is often left in pla

no longer needed. At a speed

more fuel as a result of the ex

even when it is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the altern

for electricity, fuel consumptio

turn off electrical equipment w

ment that use a lot of electrici

heating or the seat heaters*.

Environmental friendlin

Environmental protection is a

and production of your new S

Design measures for economi

Joints and connections de

Modular construction to fa

Increased use of single-gr

Driving and the environment 205

Safety Fir Technical Data

must be taken into consideration:

atalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is

the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-

out service station networks selling unleaded

ssible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-

are not available or that the Authorised Service

ited repairs.

ors will gladly provide information about the

vehicle and also about necessary maintenance

dlights

nd drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or

pped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming

t apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight

available in your Authorised Service Centre.

dlights, the rotation system must previously be

ase go to a specialist workshop.

Altea_EN.book Seite 205 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Plastic parts and elastomers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,

ISO 11469 and ISO 1629

Choice of materials

Nearly all materials used can be recycled

Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling

Recycled materials used in manufacture

Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics

CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioner

Compliance with prohibited materials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,

mercury, chrome VI.

Manufacturing methods

Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts

Solvent-free cavity sealing

Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit

Solvent-free adhesives

No CFCs used in production

Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building

materials

Overall water consumption reduced

Heat recovery systems

The use of water-soluble paint

Driving abroad

Observations

To drive abroad, the following

For vehicles fitted with a c

available for the journey. See

tions will have information ab

fuel.

In some countries, it is po

tions where some spare parts

Centre may only carry out lim

SEAT importers and distribut

technical preparation of your

and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for hea

If you have to drive a right-ha

vice versa, the asymmetric di

traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you mus

lenses. Further information is

In vehicles with adaptive hea

disconnected. To do this, ple

Trailer towing206

and drawbar loads that are given on the data

for certification purposes only. The correct

, which may be lower than these figures for the

e registration documents Section Technical

o that heavy objects are as near to the axle as

trailer must be secured to prevent them

um permissible pressure shown on the sticker

lap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in

nufacturer's recommendations.

ough of the road behind the trailer with the

the case, you should have additional mirrors

ould be mounted on hinged extension

give sufficient vision to the rear.

railer. This could result in fatal accidents.

itional demands on the vehicle. We recom-

een the normal inspection intervals if the

towing a trailer.

Altea_EN.book Seite 206 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Trailer towing

Instructions to follow

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-

ment.

If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have

the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements

for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see

page 208.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection

between the trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is

available in any SEAT dealer.

Trailer weight / drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to

the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly

steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to

1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and

therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced

air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The

weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for

every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the

actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.

When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar load

on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.

The figures for trailer weights plate of the towing bracket are

figures for your specific model

towing bracket, are given in th

data.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer s

possible. Loads carried in the

moving.

Tyre pressure

Set tyre pressure to the maxim

on the inside of the fuel tank f

accordance with the trailer ma

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see en

standard mirrors. If this is not

fitted. Both exterior mirrors sh

brackets. Adjust the mirrors to

WARNING

Never transport people in a t

Note Towing a trailer places add

mend additional services betw

vehicle is used frequently for

Trailer towing 207

Safety Fir Technical Data

d trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For

t to drive at the maximum permissible speed in

er or wind conditions. This applies especially

ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest

stop the snaking by increasing speed.

f the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the

, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be

locking. Select a low gear in due course before

. This enables you to use the engine braking to

d during prolonged slopes, driving in a low gear

ys monitor the temperature gauge for the

e*

bilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.

Altea_EN.book Seite 207 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your

country.

Ball coupling of towing bracket*

Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may

be stored in the tool box.

The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the

ball coupling of the towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.

Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed

and it obscures the number plate.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very

unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow

for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle an

this reason, it is advisable no

an unfavourable road, weath

when driving downhill.

You should always reduce spe

sign of snaking. Never try to

Always brake in due course. I

brakes gently at first and then

caused by the trailer wheels

going down a steep downhill

slow down the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures an

and high engine speed, alwa

coolant page 55.

Electronic Stability Programm

The ESP* system helps to sta

Trailer towing208

Fig. 154 Attachment points for towing bracket

Altea_EN.book Seite 208 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Fitting a towing bracket*

It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.

Trailer towing 209

Safety Fir Technical Data

ncorrectly installed, there is serious danger of

se observe the instructions provided by the bracket.

ncorrectly installed, this could cause damage to

.

ing of a trailer bracket is not recommended due

.

Altea_EN.book Seite 209 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be

completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the

vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should

never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and

including the maximum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

357 mm

569 mm

875 mm

1,040 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,

before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre

to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting

of a separate warning lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and

reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a

torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle's

electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialised knowledge and

tools.

Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment

points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.

If the towing bracket is i accident.

For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing

Caution If the electrical socket is i

the vehicle's electrical system

Note For the sports model (FR), fitt

to the design of the bumpers

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning210

in products may produce noxious vapours; entilated areas.

, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other c and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-

cle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch ndbrake firmly and remove the key from the

mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.

e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the

our vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty

vironment for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones

nvironment.

e products should not be disposed of with ordi-

e the disposal information on the package.

Altea_EN.book Seite 210 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your

vehicle.

Your vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may

also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the

event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your car against the harmful effects of the environ-

ment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer

substances such as insects remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road

dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials

remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High

temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive

effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the

underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the

product instructions until you have used them up.

WARNING

Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or

your vehicle. The use of certa they should be used in well v

Never use fuel, turpentine volatile fluids. These are toxi sion.

Before washing your vehi the engine off, apply your ha ignition.

Caution Never attempt to remove dirt,

Never use a dry cloth or spong

paintwork or the windows of y

of water.

For the sake of the en When purchasing products

which are not harmful to the e

The leftovers of the car car

nary household waste. Observ

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 211

Safety Fir Technical Data

h plenty of water and rinse it off.

top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove

ht pressure.

ove often with clean water.

hould only be used for very stubborn dirt.

anels etc. until last with a different

ughly with water.

e gently with a chamois leather.

old, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces

reezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

effect and braking distancethe brakes by

gnition switched off.

rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of

Altea_EN.book Seite 211 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Vehicle exterior maintenance

Automatic car wash tunnel

The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-

matic car wash.

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed

without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-

work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,

the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative

products.

Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such

as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-

way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-

ator.

After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and

pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking

several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci- dent.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt wit

Clean your vehicle from

or a brush. Use very lig

Rinse the sponge or gl

Special car shampoo s

Clean the wheels, sill p

sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoro

Dry your vehicle surfac

When temperature is c to prevent them from f

seals.

After washing

Directly after washing,

page 201, Braking

braking several times.

WARNING

Wash your car with the i

Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning212

istance for soft materials and painted

ure cleaner to remove ice or snow from

jet nozzles (rotating jets) .

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

everal times page 201.

oncentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at short cleaning times, visible and invisible s. This may cause an accident.

brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

an 60C. This could damage the vehicle.

hicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive

es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is

inted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is

wear on the material.

ce

the paintwork.

car if water does not form small drops and run

ean.

Altea_EN.book Seite 212 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.

Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a

dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork

or glass on your vehicle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with

a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the

doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided

wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage

system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,

particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying d

bumpers.

Do not use a high press

windows page 213.

Never use concentrated

Directly after washing,

the brakes by braking s

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a c large spraying distances and damage can occur to the tyre

Water, ice and salt on the accident.

Caution Do not use water hotter th

To avoid damage to the ve

materials such as flexible hos

also important for bumpers pa

to the surface, the greater the

Vehicle paint maintenan

Regular waxing protects

You need to apply wax to your

off the paintwork when it is cl

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 213

Safety Fir Technical Data

ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may

e liquid is accidentally spilled.

contain solvents will damage the material.

exterior mirrors

ith commercially available, alcohol based

clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

move snow from the windows and mirrors.

leather to dry the windows. The chamois

aces are not suitable to clean windows because

osits which could smear the windows.

ay to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push

ut swinging it.

one remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-

with a special cleaner available in your Author-

osits on the windscreen could cause the wiper

cleanser, specifically for removing wax, is added

Altea_EN.book Seite 213 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

A good quality hard wax product is available from your Authorised Service

Centre.

Regular wax applications help to protects the paintwork from environmental

contaminants. page 210. It also protects against minor scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-

able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot

be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in

your Authorised Service Centre.

The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax

compounds to seal the paint page 212, Vehicle paint maintenance.

Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or

on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents damage plastic parts.

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved

solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products.

Caution The use of liquid air freshe

damage the plastic parts if th

Cleaning products which

Cleaning windows and

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows w

glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a

Removing snow

Use a small brush to re

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois

leathers used on painted surf

they are soiled with wax dep

If possible, use a de-icing spr

it in one direction only witho

Use window cleaner or a silic

cone deposits off.

Wax deposits can be removed

ised Service Centre. Wax dep

blades to judder. If a window

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning214

, windows, bonnet and tailgate will remain

are treated with a suitable care product (for

o prevent premature ageing and leaks. The

rubber seals are well looked after, they will not

can freeze up in winter.

u should only use spray with lubricating and

h a damp cloth.

h a soft, dry cloth.

ing results, use a specialist chrome cleaning ducts will remove stains and coatings from the

surfaces:

product on chrome.

me parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

Altea_EN.book Seite 214 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax

deposits are not removed.

Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and

mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the

window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements

inside the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen

wiper blades.

2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use

a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.

Rubber seals maintenance

If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so

quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.

The rubber strips on the doors

pliable and last longer if they

example silicone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will als

doors will be easier to open. If

freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders

To de-ice the lock cylinders yo

anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts wit

2. Polish chrome parts wit

If this does not provide satisfy

product. Chrome cleaning pro

surface.

Caution To prevent scratching chrome

Never use an abrasive care

Do not clean or polish chro

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 215

Safety Fir Technical Data

gents should not be used. If the protective

lying stones, the damaged area should be

ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances sible and invisible damage can occur to the ident.

e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry raking several times.

is coated to protect it from chemical

e.

damaged when driving. We recommend you to

under the body and on the running gear, and

e and after the winter season.

our Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair

osion work.

nti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, at shields on the exhaust system. The heat of gine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.

Altea_EN.book Seite 215 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on

steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry page 201 the brakes by braking several times.

Alloy wheel rims

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.

Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.

Every three months

Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road

salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be

impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.

Car polish or other abrasive a

coating is damaged, e.g. by f

repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vi tyres. This may cause an acc

Water, ice and salt on th accident. Directly after wash page 201 the brakes by b

Underbody protection

The vehicle underbody

and mechanical damag

The protective coating can be

check the protective coating

reinstated if necessary, befor

We recommend you to go to y

work and additional anti-corr

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or a catalytic converter or the he the exhaust system or the en

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning216

fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!

vironment ould be removed when the engine is washed.

eaned in an oil separator. For this reason,

ried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol

aintenance

anel cleaning

h to clean plastic parts and the dash

satisfactory results, use a special

aning product.

nd the airbag module surface with cleansers s cause the surface to become porous. If the ing plastic parts could cause substantial inju-

Altea_EN.book Seite 216 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-

corrosion treatment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is

frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,

the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and

after winter.

Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide

the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend

having this work performed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment

is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.

On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and

components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 227.

Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.

Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.

Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp- edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.

Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh

For the sake of the en Fuel, grease and oil deposits c

The polluted water must be cl

engine washing should be car

station.

Vehicle interior m

Plastic parts and dash p

Use a clean, damp clot

panel.

If this does not provide

solvent-free plastic cle

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel a containing solvents. Solvent airbag triggered, disintegrat ries.

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 217

Safety Fir Technical Data

ollen cloth with water and wipe over the

be removed using a mild soap solution

tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

ak through the leather or soak into the

ft, dry cloth.

treated twice a year with a special leather-

in your Authorised Service Centre.

ery sparingly.

ft, dry cloth.

le to preserve the genuine qualities of this

atural properties of the specially selected hides

r has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.

d in everyday use and when looking after the

seams can scratch and damage the surface. If

iation for long periods, the leather should be

ading. However, slight colour variations in high-

rmal.

Altea_EN.book Seite 217 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap

solution.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning

Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned

with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.

Cleaning the radio and climate controls

To clean the radio and/or climate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more

resistant dirt, a neutral soap solution may be used.

Leather cleaning*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or wo

leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can

(pure liquid soap; two

and a cloth.

Do not let the water so

seams.

Then wipe off with a so

Leather maintenance

The leather should be

care product, available

Apply these products v

Then wipe off with a so

SEAT does everything possib

natural product. Due to the n

employed, the finished leathe

so a degree of care is require

leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and

the vehicle is under solar rad

protected to prevent it from f

quality natural leather are no

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning218

tion at regular intervals. If you notice that the tor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is placed by a specialist workshop.

damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

s to dry completely before rolling them up.

could become damaged.

Altea_EN.book Seite 218 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar

products on leather.

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified

workshop.

Seat belts cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly.

Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.

If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic

belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.

Check all seat belts condi belt webbing, fittings, retrac damaged, the belt must be re

Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod

Caution After cleaning, allow seat belt

Otherwise, the belt retractors

WARNING (continued)

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 219

Safety Fir Technical Data

r the CE mark (European Union manufacturer

ephone holders or drink holders, should never ithin the working range, of the airbags. Other- jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

ations

ays be carried out according to our

to the electronic components or software in the

ns. Due to the way the electronic components

s, other indirect systems may be affected by the

air safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-

ur vehicle registration documents.

tres cannot be held liable for any damage

/or work incorrectly performed.

nd that all work should be performed by an

ing Genuine SEAT approved parts and acces-

Altea_EN.book Seite 219 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications

Accessories and spare parts

Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before

purchasing accessories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical

changes to your car, we recommend you to consult your Authorised Service

Centre.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information

about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-

turer regarding accessories and parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in

question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have

the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and

professionally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess

the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For

this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts

used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or

are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the

vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-

controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the

European Union's authorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to

control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator

fan, etc.), then they must bea

conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example tel be fitted on the covers, or w wise, there is a danger of in

Technical modific

Modifications must alw

specifications.

Unauthorised modifications

vehicle may cause malfunctio

are linked together in network

faults. This can seriously imp

nents, and also invalidate yo

SEAT Authorised Service Cen

caused by modifications and

For this reason, we recomme

Authorised Service Centre us

sories.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications220

rily on driving. If you are distracted while ident.

e mountings to the surfaces covering the ge of the airbags. There is a high danger of d.

nstructions of your mobile telephone / two-way

Altea_EN.book Seite 220 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.

Roof aerial*

The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be

positioned parallel to the roof.

To fold down

Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.

To return to working position

Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones

First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-

phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of

10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-

ities for retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified

workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Always concentrate prima driving you could have an acc

Never attach the telephon airbag units or within the ran injury if the airbag is triggere

Note Please observe the operating i

radio.

Checking and refilling levels 221

Safety Fir Technical Data

, without releasing the cap, clockwise

ose the flap until it clicks into place. The

th an anti-loss attachment

the vehicle on the right.

s operated correctly, it will switch itself off as

ver attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will

el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

r vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the

otes on fuel can be found.

le and can cause serious burns and other inju-

y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the anister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

ents for the use of spare fuel canisters.

do not recommend carrying a spare fuel he canister could be damaged in an accident

tances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, g points:

el canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- ild up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to

ly explosive. Always place the canister on the

Altea_EN.book Seite 221 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-

mately 55 litres.

Unscrewing the tank cap

Lift the lid.

Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then insert the key into the

lock and rotate 180 to the left.

Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.

Closing the tank cap

Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a click.

Turn the key in the lock

through 180.

Remove the key and cl

tank cap is secured wi

The tank flap is at the rear of

If the automatic filler nozzle i

soon as the tank is full. Ne

fill the expansion chamber. Fu

The correct fuel grade for you

fuel tank flap. where further n

WARNING

Fuel is highly inflammab ries.

Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel c

Follow legal requirem

For safety reasons we canister in the vehicle. T and leak.

If, in exceptional circums please observe the followin

Never fill the spare fu trostatic charge could bu ignite. This may be fatal ground to fill it.

Fig. 155 Tank flap open

Checking and refilling levels222

ved from the paintwork immediately.

tely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause

fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

vironment ter the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;

rflow if it becomes warm.

. 156 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck and adapter.

Altea_EN.book Seite 222 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

Caution Fuel spills should be remo

Never run the tank comple

misfiring. As a result, unburnt

cause damage.

For the sake of the en Do not try to put in more fuel af

this may cause the fuel to ove

LPG system*

Refuelling with LPG

The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, next to the petrol filler neck.

WARNING (continued)

Fig

Checking and refilling levels 223

Safety Fir Technical Data

e spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres. If

very low, it may not be possible to completely

f LPG pump, and the methods of use may vary.

tor fill the tank when refuelling for the first time

LPG

ises may be heard. These noises are insignifi-

G in the correct way could result in a fire, cause y.

and inflammable substance. It may cause y.

fore refuelling.

le phones and any other radiophony appli- aves may produce sparks and cause a fire.

icle while refuelling. If it is absolutely neces- se the door and touch a metal surface before

ain. This will prevent the generation of static fires while refuelling.

ay leak out after refuelling. If LPG comes into risk of freezing.

s keep bare flames away from the tank during ay lead to an explosion.

Altea_EN.book Seite 223 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Refuelling with LPG

Before refuelling, stop the engine and switch off the ignition.

Open the tank flap.

Before refuelling, please read the instructions on the pump.

Unscrew the cap of the gas filler neck .

Screw the required adapter on the gas filler neck .

Refuel as indicated in the instructions on the pump.

Unscrew the adapter .

Screw on the cap of the gas filler neck .

Close the tank flap.

When the hose is removed from the tank, a small amount of LPG may spill out

.

The LPG tank fig. 157 in th

the outside temperatures are

fill the LPG tank.

Pump attachments

There are a variety of types o

Therefore, let the pump opera

or fill from another pump.

Noises when refuelling with

When refuelling with LPG, no

cant.

WARNING

Failure to refuel or handle LP an explosion or lead to injur

LPG is a highly explosive severe burns and other injur

Switch off the engine be

Always disconnect mobi ances, as electromagnetic w

Do not remain in the veh sary to enter the vehicle, clo touching the attachment ag electricity and any possible

Small quantities of LPG m contact with skin, there is a

Do not smoke and alway refuelling. Failure to do so m

Fig. 157 LPG tank in spare wheel well

A1

A2 A1

A2

A1

Checking and refilling levels224

f adapter in Europe are the ACME adapter ,

the bayonet adapter and the EURO adapter

end you carry all four adapters in your vehicle,

an one type of filling system. The introduction

) throughout Europe is being studied.

el and is a blend of propane and butane.

he strict regulations concerning exhaust gas

fossil fuels, LPG is characterised by its reduced

re regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and

out Europe.

winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a

gas. As a result, the driving range of winter gas

d consumption) than that of summer gas.

onstantly increasing.

ay be found on Internet.

rmed on this vehicle while running with LPG

of safety.

A1

A3

Altea_EN.book Seite 224 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Adapter for the liquid petroleum gas (LPG) filler neck

An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of

pumps with different nozzles.

Fig. 158 General table of LPG filler neck adapters.

ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)

Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)

Bayonet adapter

EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)

The supply includes the adapter for the country in question, the ACME , the

Dish Coupling , the bayonet or the EURO adapter .

The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As

petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your

LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before

travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.

Note The four most common types o

the Dish Coupling adapter ,

. On the whole, we recomm

as some countries use more th

of a single system (Euronozzle

LPG fuel

LPG is an alternative vehicle fu

The success of LPG is due to t

emissions. Compared to other

emissions.

LPG quality and consumption

Quality requirements for LPG a

permit the use of LPG through

A difference is drawn between

higher proportion of propane

may be lower (due to increase

LPG supplier network

The number of LPG pumps is c

Lists of existing LPG pumps m

LPG safety

A series of collision tests perfo

have confirmed its high level

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2 A3 A4

A2

A4

Checking and refilling levels 225

Safety Fir Technical Data

, please refer to the SEAT web page, which lists

repair these faults.

types are listed on a sticker inside the

onding to standard DIN EN 228, may be used

verters (EN = European Standard).

by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON

r, unit for determining the knock resistance of

ith a higher octane number than the one recom-

ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel

er.

vehicle is given in the technical table for the

tion

may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.

thanol fuels available at commercial establish-

85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,

damage the fuel system.

d fuel would permanently impair the efficiency

Altea_EN.book Seite 225 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The safety of the LPG system guarantees operation without risk. The following

safety measures have been adopted:

The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which closes automatically when the

engine is switched off (ignition off) or when running on petrol.

A solenoid type main valve disconnects the supply of gas to the engine

compartment when the engine is switched off or running on petrol.

A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to the outside prevents the gas

from entering the vehicle compartment.

All anchorage points and materials have been designed to ensure the

maximum possible levels of safety.

The condition of the LPG system should be checked regularly to guarantee

safe driving conditions . These checks are included in the Maintenance

Programme.

WARNING

If there is a smell of gas or a suspected leak, stop the vehicle immedi- ately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate the vehicle. Do not carry on driving! Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault repaired.

Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and remove from the vehicle any objects which might produce a spark or cause a fire, and switch off imme- diately if gas is smelt or a leak is detected.

LGP tanks are subject to pressure and must be checked regularly. The owner of the vehicle must check that these services are performed correctly.

When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage), make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.

Note For any fault in the LGP system

the workshops authorised to

Petrol

Petrol types

The recommended fuel

fuel tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol, corresp for vehicles with catalytic con

Fuel types are differentiated

= Regulation Octane Numbe

petrol). You may use petrol w

mended for your engine. How

consumption and engine pow

The correct fuel type for your

engine. Technical Data Sec

Caution Petrol that follows EN 228

However, the so-called bioe

ments with reference E50 or E

may not be used, as they will

Even one tankful of leade

of the catalytic converter.

Checking and refilling levels226

d to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any iesel. The use of biodiesel may cause damage

tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by

ordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is

damage to the engine or the fuel system.

n designed to be used exclusively with diesel

rd EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene,

l. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle with the

t the engine. Seek assistance from specialised

f these fuels may severely damage the fuel

ter.

iesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at

e the fuel thickens due to wax separation.

l fuel is available in some countries during

d at temperatures as low as -22C.

atic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold

racteristics. Check with an Authorised Service

country concerned regarding the type of diesel

Altea_EN.book Seite 226 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using

petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

For the sake of the environment Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the

catalytic converter.

Petrol additives

Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.

The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and

service life of the engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol

containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the

fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.

If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,

the required additives must be added during refuelling.

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It

must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates

the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.

Notes on refuelling page 221.

Biodiesel*

Caution Your vehicle is not designe

circumstances refuel with biod

to the engine and the fuel sys

the diesel manufacturer in acc

authorised and will not cause

The diesel engine has bee

fuel in accordance with standa

fuel oil or any other type of fue

wrong type of fuel, do not star

personnel. The composition o

system and the engine.

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in win

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade d

sub-zero temperatures becaus

Therefore, winter-grade diese

the cold months. It can be use

In countries with different clim

has different temperature cha

Centre or filling stations in the

fuels available.

Checking and refilling levels 227

Safety Fir Technical Data

ge 229.

n the engine compartment unless you know

obs and have the correct tools! Have the work

kshop if you are uncertain.

ables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and

ly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of

Service Centres concerning modifications. For

ou to have service fluids and consumables

rvice Centre. Please observe the relevant

engine compartment of the vehicle is a

the engine compartment, e.g. checking and k of injury and scalding as well as the risk of

f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining eam or coolant is emitted, then allow the lly opening the bonnet.

d remove the key from the ignition.

move the gear lever to neutral or gear lever to

the vehicle.

arts. There is a risk of burns.

ot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This

uits in the electrical system, particularly at the are attached page 277. The battery could

Altea_EN.book Seite 227 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well

equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains

operational to approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is

safe to -15C.

However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start

at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for

a while.

Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.

Working in the engine compartment

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the

engine must be carried out cautiously.

Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-

ment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the gear lever to position P.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet pa

You should not do any work i

exactly how to carry out the j

carried out by a qualified wor

All service fluids and consum

batteries, are being constant

information to the Authorised

this reason, we recommend y

replaced by an Authorised Se

instructions page 219. The

hazardous area .

WARNING

All work on the engine or in refilling fluids, involves a ris accident or fire.

Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme burns. Wait until no more st engine to cool before carefu

Switch off the engine an

Apply the handbrake and position P.

Keep children away from

Never touch hot engine p

Never spill liquids on a h is a fire hazard.

Avoid causing short-circ points where the jump leads explode.

Checking and refilling levels228

flames.

nguisher on hand.

service fluids, make absolutely certain that you

servoirs. Failure to observe this point will result

ngine damage!

vironment ul to the environment. For this reason you

n the ground underneath your vehicle. If you

, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified

Altea_EN.book Seite 228 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!

Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!

Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.

Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.

If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following points:

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.

Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings:

Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Do not smoke.

Never work near naked

Always have a fire exti

Caution When changing or topping up

fill the fluids into the correct re

in serious malfunctions and e

For the sake of the en Service fluids leaks are harmf

should make regular checks o

find spots of oil or other fluids

workshop.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 229

Safety Fir Technical Data

t ensure that the windscreen wipers are in

pull the lever under the dash panel

tion indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be

ction .

he release lever (arrow) and open the

y and secure it in fixture designed for this

f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt.

, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, net.

ine compartment, always observe the safety

tly

y and replace it in its support.

cm let it fall so it is locked.

Altea_EN.book Seite 229 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Opening the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.

Before opening the bonne

rest position.

To release the bonnet,

fig. 159 in the direc

released by a spring a

Lift the bonnet using t

bonnet.

Release the bonnet sta

in the bonnet.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme

Wait until no more steam then carefully open the bon

When working in the eng warnings page 227.

Closing the bonnet

Raise the bonnet sligh

Release the bonnet sta

At a height of about 30

Fig. 159 Detail of foot- well area on driver side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Fig. 160 Arrester hook for bonnet.

Checking and refilling levels230

on the performance of the engine for example,

onsumption and a higher emission level.

ferent oils may be mixed as long as they all

rds) set out in the following page should

service oil; the container will display together

rol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for

selected according to the diagram.

e falls outside the limits of the scale for a short

quired.

Fig. 161 Types of oil according to temperature

Altea_EN.book Seite 230 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and

let it fall as before.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.

Engine oil

Engine oil specifications

The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications.

Specifications

The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be

used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme

cold.

As the use of good quality oil is necessary for the correct operation and long

service life of the engine, when it becomes necessary to replenish or change

the oil, always use an oil that complies to the VW standards.

If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil

conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at

atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil

may have some repercussions

long starting time, increased c

If a top up is required then dif

conform to the VW standards.

The specifications (VW standa

appear on the container of the

the different standards for pet

both types of engines.

Oil properties

Viscosity

The viscosity class of the oil is

When the ambient temperatur

period, an oil change is not re

Checking and refilling levels 231

Safety Fir Technical Data

l level

indicates the level of the oil.

orizontal position.

t idle speed until the service temperature

ipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and

g it in as far as it will go.

ore and check the oil level fig. 162. Top

cessary.

Fig. 162 Engine oil dipstick.

Altea_EN.book Seite 231 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Mono-grade oil

Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to

ranges of viscosity23).

These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very

warm.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration

caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the

corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Checking the engine oi

The engine oil dipstick

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a h

Briefly run the engine a

is reached then stop.

Wait two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. W

insert it again, pushin

Then pull it out once m

up with engine oil if ne

Oil level in area

Do not add oil.

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00

Diesel. Engines without Particulate

filter (DPF)

VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01

Diesel. Engines with Particulate filter

(DPF)a)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

VW 507 00

23) Viscosity: oil density

AA

Checking and refilling levels232

all quantities of oil.

, read and observe the warnings in

rking in the engine compartment on

ler opening fig. 163.

unts, using the correct oil.

h engine oil, you should top-up using

while and check the oil level before

is in area , carefully close the cap.

ening is shown in the corresponding engine

age 287.

Fig. 163 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

AB

Altea_EN.book Seite 232 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Oil level in area

Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after zone

Oil level in area

Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should afterwards be in

zone .

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil

consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be

higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be

checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a

journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 227.

Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result

in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised

Service Centre.

Topping up engine oil

Top up gradually with sm

Before opening the bonnet

Safety instructions on wo

page 227.

Unscrew cap from oil fil

Top-up oil in small amo

To avoid over-filling wit

small quantities, wait a

adding any more oil.

As soon as the oil level

The position of the oil filler op

compartment illustration p

AB

AA

AC

AA

AA

Checking and refilling levels 233

Safety Fir Technical Data

et, read and observe the warnings tions on working in the engine compartment.

ol down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.

void injuries caused by splashes of oil.

rain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.

ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of is disposed of.

with engine oil. This could result in engine

by the use of such additives would not be

ty.

nvironment roblems, the necessary special tools and

d, we recommend that you have the engine oil

orised Service Centre.

s or into the ground.

hen draining the used oil. It must be large

oil.

Altea_EN.book Seite 233 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Engine oil specification page 230.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.

Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result

in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-

shop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in

through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the

exhaust system.

Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the

service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised

Service Centre.

The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.

WARNING

Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!

Before opening the bonn page 227, Safety instruc

Wait for the engine to co

Wear eye protection to a

When removing the oil d zontal to help prevent oil fro

Wash your skin thorough

Engine oil is poisonous! the reach of children until it

Caution No additives should be used

damage. Any damage caused

covered by the factory warran

For the sake of the e Because of the disposal p

specialist knowledge require

and filter changed by an Auth

Never pour oil down drain

Use a suitable container w

enough to hold all the engine

AA

AA

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels234

onsiderably inferior corrosion protection. The

ing system can lead to a loss of coolant,

e engine.

(purple) can be mixed with the additive G12

red colour) with G11.

vel and topping up

l is important for fault-free func-

oling system.

, read and observe the warnings in

rking in the engine compartment on

Fig. 164 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap

Altea_EN.book Seite 234 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Coolant

Coolant specifications

Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-

tive.

The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of

our coolant additive G12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F (it

is dyed purple). This mixture provides the necessary frost protection down to

-25C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It

also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.

The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost

protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of

the antifreeze additive G12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of

coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost

protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60% anti-

freeze additive will give frost protection to approx. -40C.

WARNING

The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.

The coolant additive G12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that can be expected. At extremely cold outside temperatures, the coolant could freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would also not work in this situation, there is a risk of suffering exposure!

Caution Other additives may give c

resulting corrosion in the cool

causing serious damage to th

The coolant additive G12+

(red) or G11. Never mix G12 (

Checking the coolant le

The correct coolant leve

tioning of the engine co

Before opening the bonnet

Safety instructions on wo

page 227.

Checking and refilling levels 235

Safety Fir Technical Data

yed purple) may be mixed with G12 (dyed red)

ngine compartment or on the engine must be

ine compartment, always observe the safety

or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do xpansion tank when the engine is hot. This is

ditives the colour of G12 will change to brown.

the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do

ge!

as been lost, wait for the engine to cool down

t. This avoids damaging the engine. Large

on of leaks in the cooling system. See a special-

nd have the cooling system checked. Other-

damage.

Altea_EN.book Seite 235 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Opening the coolant expansion tank

Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a

thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .

Checking coolant level

Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the

coolant level.

If the level is below the MIN mark, top up with coolant.

Topping up coolant

Only use new coolant liquid.

Do not fill above the MAX mark.

Closing the coolant expansion tank

Screw the cap on again tightly.

The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding

engine compartment illustration page 287.

Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications page 234.

Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G12+ is not avail-

able. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up

to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive

page 234.

Always top up with new coolant.

Do not fill above the MAX mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced

out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.

The coolant additive G12+ (d

and also with G 11.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the e carried out cautiously.

When working in the eng warnings page 227.

When the engine is warm not unscrew the cap on the e a burn injury risk.

Caution When mixed with other ad

If this occurs you should have

so will result in engine dama

If a lot of liquid coolant h

before putting in cold coolan

coolant losses are an indicati

ised workshop immediately a

wise, there is a risk of engine

Checking and refilling levels236

ngine compartment or on the engine must be

ine compartment, always observe the safety

eze or other additives into the windscreen

screen cleansing products diluted as per

asher fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes

ld become blocked.

Altea_EN.book Seite 236 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades

Topping up washer fluid

The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be

mixed with washer fluid.

The windscreen washer and the headlight washers are supplied with fluid

from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.

The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.

Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-

mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.

Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-

gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please

follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the e carried out cautiously.

When working in the eng warnings page 227.

Caution Never put radiator anti-fre

washer fluid.

Always use approved wind

instructions. If you use other w

in the fan-shaped nozzles cou

Fig. 165 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.

Checking and refilling levels 237

Safety Fir Technical Data

necessary to change the rest position of

osition.

ging wiper blades)

lades are not frozen.

f and then (before approx. 8 seconds have

ndscreen wiper lever to the intermittent

dscreen wipers will move to the service

wiper blades

y from the windscreen.

free the blade and pull in the direction of

ical length and design into the wiper arm.

clicks into position.

ack against the windscreen.

ar, they should be replaced if they are damaged,

esired results, the setting angle of the wind-

ncorrect. They should be checked by a qualified

cessary.

e good visibility through all windows!

Altea_EN.book Seite 237 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing windscreen wiper blades

If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you

will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper

blades should be replaced immediately.

To change the blades it is

the wipers to the service p

Service position (For chan

Ensure that the wiper b

Turn ignition on and of

elapsed), move the wi

wipe position. The win

position.

Changing the windscreen

Lift the wiper arm awa

Push the side buttons,

the arrow fig. 167

Fitting the wiper blade

Insert a blade of ident

Slide the blade until it

Push the wiper arms b

If the windscreen wipers sme or cleaned if they are soiled.

If this does not produce the d

screen wiper arms might be i

workshop and corrected if ne

WARNING

Do not drive unless you hav

Fig. 166 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion

Fig. 167 Changing the front wiper blades

Checking and refilling levels238

r blade

is essential for clear rear vision.

should be replaced immediately.

Fig. 168 Remove rear window wiper blade

Fig. 169 Fit the rear window wiper blade

Altea_EN.book Seite 238 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.

The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to

clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.

Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This

could cause damage.

Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service

position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.

Note The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the

bonnet is properly closed.

Changing the rear wipe

A good rear wiper blade

Damaged wiper blades

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 239

Safety Fir Technical Data

id level

ed at the intervals given in the service

at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It

een the MIN and MAX marks.

reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine

age 287. The brake fluid reservoir has a black

ightly when the vehicle is being used as the

adjusted as they wear.

Fig. 170 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover

Altea_EN.book Seite 239 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm away from the glass page 238, fig. 168

Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove

the blade page 238, fig. 168.

Fitting the wiper blade

With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.

Place the blade as shown in the page 238, fig. 169 and slide

the adapter along until it engages.

Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.

If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned

if soiled.

If this is not sufficient, refer to a qualified workshop.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.

The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

Caution A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to

clean the window.

Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake flu

The brake fluid is check

schedule.

Read off the fluid level

should always be betw

The position of the brake fluid

compartment illustration p

and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops sl

brake pads are automatically

Checking and refilling levels240

t to check the brake fluid level, read and e 227.

red in the closed original container in a safe . There is a toxic risk.

change according to the Maintenance brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake

too long. This would seriously affect the effi- safety of the vehicle. This may cause an acci-

paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the

vironment d disposed of in the proper manner observing

Altea_EN.book Seite 240 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru-

ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low page 77.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 227.

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Programme indicates the brake fluid

change intervals.

We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised

Service Centre.

Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 227 in

section Safety notes for working in the engine compartment.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from

the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake

system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the

brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which

could impair the braking effect.

It is important that you use only brake fluid compliant with US standard

FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.

Before opening the bonne observe the warnings pag

Brake fluid should be sto place out of reach of children

Complete the brake fluid Programme. Heavy use of the fluid is left in the system for ciency of the brakes and the dent.

Caution Brake fluid could damage the

paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the en Brake fluid must be drained an

environmental regulations.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 241

Safety Fir Technical Data

ery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause

re of gases is released when the battery is should be charged in a well-ventilated room

acid and batteries.

ectrical system, you must switch off the consumers. The negative cable on the battery

a light bulb is changed, you need only switch

alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you alarm will otherwise be triggered.

battery from the vehicle electrical system, cable and then the positive cable.

onsumers before reconnecting the battery. cable and then the negative cable. Never onnections. This could cause an electrical fire.

ttery, or one which has thawed. This could mical burns. Always replace a battery which freeze at temperatures around 0C.

e is always connected to the battery.

ttery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a ly.

ery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine

e the electrical system or electronic compo-

to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as

on can damage the battery housing.

Altea_EN.book Seite 241 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Vehicle battery

Warnings on handling the battery

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical system:

Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi- ately.

Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic

charge. Never short the batt injury.

A highly explosive mixtu under charge. The batteries only.

Keep children away from

Before working on the el engine, the ignition and all must be disconnected. When off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft disconnect the battery! The

When disconnecting the disconnect first the negative

Switch off all electrical c Reconnect first the positive reverse the polarity of the c

Never charge a frozen ba result in explosions and che has frozen. A flat battery can

Ensure that the vent hos

Never use a defective ba damaged battery immediate

Caution Never disconnect the batt

is running. This could damag

nents.

Do not expose the battery

the intense ultraviolet radiati

Wear eye protection

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-

tive gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the

battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels242

the vehicle battery

nce-free and is checked during the

ork on the vehicle battery requires

es or if the vehicle is not driven for long

checked by a qualified workshop between the

nd you have problems starting the vehicle, the

this happens, we recommend you have the

Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-

charged by a qualified workshop only, as

logy have been installed and they must be

nment.

d to suit the conditions of its location and has

he maintenance, performance and safety spec-

nly maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This

on the batteries, you must read and observe ings on handling the battery on page 241.

Altea_EN.book Seite 242 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect

the battery from frost. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Checking the electrolyte level

The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-

mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.

Open the engine bonnet and the battery cover in Safety

instructions on working in the engine compartment on

page 227 in Warnings on handling the battery on

page 241.

Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the

battery.

If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until

they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-

ment diagram page 287.

The magic eye indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour,

depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.

There are two different colours:

Black: correct charge status.

Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a

specialist workshop.

Charging and changing

The battery is maintena

inspection service. All w

specialist knowledge.

If you often drive short distanc

periods, the battery should be

scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged a

battery might be damaged. If

vehicle battery checked by an

charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be

batteries using special techno

charged in a controlled enviro

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been develope

special safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil t

ifications of your vehicle.

WARNING

We recommend you use o batteries which comply with standard applies as of 2001.

Before starting any work the warnings in Warn

Checking and refilling levels 243

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 243 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They

must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary

household waste.

Wheels and tyres244

ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual

one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres

be checked immediately by an Authorised

ttern

ndicates the direction of rotation on tyres with

rve the direction of rotation indicated when

ees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

wear.

ximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- accident.

tyres. This may cause an accident.

ation or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.

e can be seen on the sticker on the

nflation pressure from the sticker. The

tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2

on the sticker.

Altea_EN.book Seite 244 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very

slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,

etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of

rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly

when you replace them.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a

cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel

rims.

New tyres

New tyres must be run in page 201.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre

and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is o

vibrations or the car pulling to

is damaged. The tyres should

Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread pa

An arrow on the tyre sidewall i

directional tread. Always obse

fitting the wheel. This guarant

planing, excessive noise and

WARNING

New tyres do not have ma larly carefully to avoid risk of

Never drive with damaged

If you notice unusual vibr driving, stop the vehicle imm

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressur

inside of the tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre i

values refer to Summer

bar to the values given

Wheels and tyres 245

Safety Fir Technical Data

ng

toring system constantly checks the

ensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by

uency spectrum of each wheel.

e genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and

ly.

are changed or one or more tyres are changed,

y pressing the SET switch on the centre console.

n the event of a loss of pressure by means of

instrument panel display. The system uses ESP

epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure

ach 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre

being driven and the tyre pressure will rise

you should only adjust the tyre pressures when

ely at ambient temperature).

re monitoring system works reliably, you should

st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

eference values) in the system.

bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

Altea_EN.book Seite 245 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are

cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be

reduced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure

should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a

journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the

tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the

slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre pressure monitori

The tyre pressure moni

pressure of the tyres.

The system uses the speed s

analysing the speed and freq

For optimum performance, us

adjust tyre pressures regular

Whenever the tyre pressures

the system should be Reset b

The system warns the driver i

symbols and messages in the

page 195.

Note that tyre pressure also d

increases about 0.1 bar for e

heats up while the vehicle is

accordingly. For this reason,

they are cold (i.e. approximat

To ensure that the tyre pressu

check and, if necessary, adju

store the correct pressures (r

A tyre pressure information la

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the

Wheels and tyres246

dependent on tyre pressure, driving

Fig. 171 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 172 Diagram for changing wheels

Altea_EN.book Seite 246 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least

one tyre is insufficient.

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the tyre(s).

Change the wheel if necessary.

Tyre service life

The service life of tyres is

style and fitting.

Wheels and tyres 247

Safety Fir Technical Data

accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn

h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater

eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-

ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.

oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

res must be replaced immediately!

nvironment ase fuel consumption.

to continue driving even with a punc-

ity of cases.

-fitted with run-flat tyres24) the loss of tyre

he instrument panel.

country.

Altea_EN.book Seite 247 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators

page 246, fig. 171, running across the tread. Depending on the make,

there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on

the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the

positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by

law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-

tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export

countries .

Tyre pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.

For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month

page 244.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable

to change them around as shown page 246, fig. 172. All the tyres will then

last for about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-

tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results

in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive

wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced

when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of

the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-

ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of

The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning

At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.

If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce

Keep chemicals such as

Damaged wheels and ty

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre

Run-flat tyres

Run-flat tyres allow you

tured tyre, in the major

In vehicles that are factory

pressure is indicated on t

24) Depending upon version and

Wheels and tyres248

of the tyres,

to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?

severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre

e is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown

uel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

riving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel

ff smoke.

onditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is

speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and bserve legal requirements when doing so.

id manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.

les (for example kerbs) or potholes.

g driven in emergency conditions, the driving ired and there is a risk of accident.

eflate on losing pressure because they are

ides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be

ion.

sed on front tyres used in emergency

Altea_EN.book Seite 248 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)

Leave the ESP/TCS (Electronic Stability Programme) switched on,

or switch on page 194.

Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from

the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-

tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.

The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:

DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are

supported on the sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can

then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for

example, low load), even more.

The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be

checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if

necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one

tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance

which can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergency conditions

When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this means

that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

smoke is coming from one

there is a smell of rubber,

the vehicle vibrates,

there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible

If one of the tyres has been

has been badly damaged ther

off and cause damage to the f

It is also advisable to stop d

starts overheating and gives o

WARNING

When driving in emergency c considerably impaired.

The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please o

Avoid sharp turns and rap

Avoid driving over obstac

If one or more tyres is bein quality of the vehicle is impa

Note The run-flat tyres do not d

supported on the reinforced s

detected with a visual inspect

Snow chains must not be u

conditions.

Wheels and tyres 249

Safety Fir Technical Data

as well as the proper facilities for disposing of

e has full information on the technical require-

nging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

use only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle

e on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all

ose with an unknown history of use.

ted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.

fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size he same tread pattern.

nvironment f according to the laws in the country concerned.

not generally possible to use the wheels from

apply to wheels of the same model. The use of

ot been approved by SEAT for use with your

icle's type approval for use on public roads.

same as the tyres that are mounted on the

ter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for

ive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel

Altea_EN.book Seite 249 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The

tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe

handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front

tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations

marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

T Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following information:

A direction of rotation symbol

Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only

on the inner side of the wheel).

DOT ... 1103 ... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th

week of 2003.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised

Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary

special tools and spare parts

the old tyres.

Any Authorised Service Centr

ments when installing or cha

WARNING

We recommend that you approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicl you have no alternative, you times.

Never use old tyres or th

If wheel trims are retrofit brakes is not restricted. This

All four wheels must be (rolling circumference) and t

For the sake of the e Old tyres must be disposed o

Note For technical reasons, it is

other vehicles. This can also

wheels or tyres which have n

model may invalidate the veh

If the spare tyre is not the

vehicle - for example with win

a short period of time and dr

as soon as possible.

Wheels and tyres250

e the vehicles handling on snow and

es will considerably improve the vehicles

er tyres (width, rubber compound, tread

and snow.

o a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures

e sticker on tank flap).

all four wheels.

er tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-

adial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the

pply to winter tyres.

eness when the tread is worn down to a depth

249, New tyres and wheels determines the

ter tyres:

hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted

sticker in the driver's field of view. These

r Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-

e followed.

for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with

hen the roads are free of snow and ice.

efer to the notes on the spare wheel

wheels.

Altea_EN.book Seite 250 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are

fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the

brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -

even if it is the same model page 219.

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.

If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Caution The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is

120 Nm.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improv

ice.

In winter conditions winter tyr

handling. The design of summ

pattern) gives less grip on ice

Winter tyres must be inflated t

specified for summer tyres (se

Winter tyres must be fitted on

Information on permitted wint tration documents. Use only r

vehicle documentation also a

Winter tyres lose their effectiv

of 4 mm.

The speed rating code page

following speed limits for win

Q max. 160 km/h

S max. 180 km/h

T max. 190 km/h

H max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles w

tyre must have an appropriate

stickers are available from you

ments of each country must b

Do not have winter tyres fitted

summer tyres handle better w

If you have a flat tyre, please r

page 249, New tyres and

Wheels and tyres 251

Safety Fir Technical Data

eed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The

ntry should be followed.

sk your Approved Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

Altea_EN.book Seite 251 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly

and reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains are only permitted on front wheels and only for tyres 195/65R15

and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch link chains

which do not protrude more than 15 mm page 286.

Other tyres may use fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9 mm,

including tension device.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety

reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be

fitted over the wheel bolts.

WARNING

Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu- facturer's instructions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact with the wheel housing.

Caution You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.

Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very

quickly.

Note In some countries, the sp

legal requirements of the cou

We recommend that you a

about appropriate wheel, tyre

If and when252

factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles .

, level ground.

en the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.

underneath the vehicle, this must be secured e, there is a risk of injury.

Altea_EN.book Seite 252 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

If and when

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel

Vehicle Tools

The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in

the luggage compartment.

Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a

finger in the fitting.

Take the on-board tools out of the vehicle.

The tool kit includes:

Jack*

Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the

wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.

Towing eye

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,

or are optional extras.

WARNING

Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.

The jack supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads. Risk of injury

Use the jack only on a firm

Never start the engine wh

If work is to be carried out by suitable stands. Otherwis

WARNING (continued)

If and when 253

Safety Fir Technical Data

hains must not be used on the compact tempo-

of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit

in place of one of the rear wheels. You can then

wheel taken from the rear and use this wheel to

heel.

be checked and corrected as soon as possible. e for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 other tyre dimensions please refer to the label so could result in an accident.

0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.

, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-

mpact spare tyres at the same time, risk of

rmal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on e wheel rim.

hicles not including a spare wheel) is

anel in the luggage compartment.

the Tyre Mobility System Tyre repair kit.

a container with sealing compound to repair the

generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will

Altea_EN.book Seite 253 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Compact temporary spare wheel* (emergency wheel)

The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles

without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when

strictly necessary.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage

compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the temporary spare wheel

Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the temporary spare wheel is only

intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The standard-size

road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare wheel.

This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot

be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the

compact temporary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow c

rary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one

the compact temporary spare

attach the snow chains to the

replace the punctured front w

WARNING

The tyre pressures must The emergency tyre pressur 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all on the fuel cap. Failure to do

Do not drive faster than 8

Avoid heavy acceleration dent.

Never use two or more co accident.

No other type of tyre (no the compact temporary spar

Tyre repair kit*

The tyre repair kit (for ve

stored under the floor p

Your vehicle is equipped with

The tyre repair kit consists of

puncture and a compressor to

Fig. 173 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel

If and when254

on and place the warning triangle in position. d also warns other road users.

on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the

ng a stone or similar object under it to prevent

ents when doing so.

ribed below

r. Also refer to page 255, fig. 174

s.

ck in the corresponding zone

then put on the spare wheel

firmly with the box spanner

Altea_EN.book Seite 254 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration

of a foreign body into the tyre.

Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not

possible with the sealing compound.

Wheel change

Preparation work

What you must do before changing a wheel.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away

from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as

level as possible.

All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage the first gear, or put the gear lever to position P for those

vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.

Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage

compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning lights This is for your own safety an

Caution If you have to change the tyre

wheel being changed by placi

the vehicle from rolling away.

Note Please observe legal requirem

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as desc

Remove the wheel cove

Slacken the wheel bolt

Raise the car with the ja

Remove the wheel and

Lower the vehicle.

Tighten the wheel bolts

Replace the hub cap.

If and when 255

Safety Fir Technical Data

e removed to gain access to the wheel

ook from the tools into the designated

the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover

Fig. 174 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap

Altea_EN.book Seite 255 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

After changing a wheel

After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.

Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.

Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-

ment and secure it.

Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as

possible.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as

possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be

120 Nm.

Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when

changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque

checked.

For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tightening

torque has been checked.

Wheel trims

The wheel trims must b

bolts.

Removing

Insert the extraction h ring, located in one of

fig. 174.

Pull off the hub cap.

If and when256

lts

loosened before raising the vehicle.

ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.

y the end turn it about one full turn to the

ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.

close to the end and turn the bolt to the

o unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel

Fig. 175 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts

Altea_EN.book Seite 256 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Wheel covers*

The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel

bolts

Removing

Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.

Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.

Fitting

Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put

pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then

press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all

round.

Loosening the wheel bo

The wheel bolts must be

Loosening

Fit the box spanner as f

Grasp the box spanner b

left fig. 175.

Tightening

Fit the box spanner as f

Grasp the box spanner

right until it is secured.

An adapter is required t

bolts.

If and when 257

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 257 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent.

Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing

down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle

for support and take care not to slip.

If and when258

t under the door sill closest to the wheel

76.

jacking point and turn the crank until the

ly below the vertical rib under the door

e arm of the jack fits around the rib under

vable base plate of the jack is flat on the

efective wheel is just clear of the ground.

of the door sills mark the jacking points

acking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack

jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.

ed on solid ground offering good support. Use

essary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as

lar to prevent the jack from slipping.

at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to ent.

ed if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.

Altea_EN.book Seite 258 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Raising the vehicle

In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with

a jack.

Locate the jacking poin

to be changed fig. 1

Place the jack under the

arm of the jack is direct

sill.

Align the jack so that th

the door sill and the mo

ground fig. 177.

Raise the jack until the d

Recesses at the front and rear

fig. 176. There is only one j

anywhere else.

An unstable surface under the

Therefore, the jack must be fitt

a large and stable base, if nec

tiles) use a rubber mat or simi

WARNING

Take all precautions so th do so could result in an accid

The vehicle can be damag jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly

Fig. 176 Jack position points

Fig. 177 Fitting the jack

If and when 259

Safety Fir Technical Data

an and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare

dition and hub mounting surfaces. These

e fitting the wheel.

screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the

rewdriver blade should be removed when the

on of rotation are fitted, note the direction of

cket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

uired to turn the anti-theft wheel

Fig. 179 Anti-theft wheel bolt

Altea_EN.book Seite 259 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Removing and fitting the wheel

For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be

completed.

After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,

change the wheel as described below:

Removing a wheel

Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the

screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface

fig. 178.

Fitting a wheel

Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the

hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.

The wheel bolts should be cle

wheel, inspect the wheel con

surfaces must be clean befor

The hexagonal socket in the

wheel bolts. The reversible sc

tool is used for this purpose.

If tyres with a specific directi

rotation.

Note Do not use the hexagonal so

tighten the wheel bolts.

Anti-theft wheel bolts*

A special adapter is req

bolts.

Fig. 178 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts

If and when260

re Mobility System)

d safety notes

a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.

a sealing compound and an air compressor are

rtment under the floor panel.

eliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-

about 4 mm in diameter.

he foreign body from the tyre.

mpound are located on the sealing compound

air compressor are included in an additional

puncture with the sealing compound if the iving the car after the tyre has lost its air.

and follow instructions concerning pound carefully.

0 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard

paired with sealing compound are only suit- short period. Therefore, please drive carefully d workshop.

vironment iners should be disposed of at a proper facility.

Altea_EN.book Seite 260 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it

will go page 259, fig. 179.

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.

Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.

Error code

The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of

the adaptor.

The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by

using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an

Authorised Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they

rotate in the correct direction.

A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that

point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-

cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give

maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong

direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum

performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.

To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the

defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again

rotate in the correct direction.

Tyre repair kit* (Ty

General information an

Your vehicle is equipped with

In the event of a tyre puncture,

located in the luggage compa

The Tyre Mobility System will r

tion of a foreign body of up to

It is not necessary to remove t

Instructions for the sealing co

container.

Notes for the proper use of the

instruction leaflet.

WARNING

Do not attempt to repair a tyre has been damaged by dr

Always observe warnings compressor and sealing com

Do not drive faster than 8 braking and fast cornering.

Tyres which have been re able for temporary use over a to the next available qualifie

For the sake of the en Used sealing compound conta

If and when 261

Safety Fir Technical Data

s on and place the warning triangle in position. nd also warns other road users.

to repair a tyre on a slope.

ents when doing so.

describe the procedures for repairing

nd

container give detailed information on

compound.

ssor and hose from the container.

t onto the valve.

able into a 12 volt power point.

d monitor the pressure shown on the pres-

Altea_EN.book Seite 261 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry. When it has dried, you can pull

it off like a piece of foil.

Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the

sealing compound exchanged by a qualified workshop.

Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not

possible with the sealing compound.

Preparation work

Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away

from the flow of traffic as possible.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.

All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System

General information and safety notes.

Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.

Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning light This is for your own safety a

Caution Take special care if you have

Note Please observe legal requirem

Tyre repair

The following sections

a tyre.

Using the sealing compou

The instructions on the

how to use the sealing

Inflating the tyre.

Remove the air compre

Screw the retaining nu

Plug the compressor c

Turn on compressor an

sure gauge.

If and when262

laced

Fig. 180 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover

Fig. 181 Fuse box cover in engine compartment

Altea_EN.book Seite 262 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Completing the repair

Remove the compressor hose from the valve.

Fit the valve cap.

Unplug the compressor from the socket.

Return all tools to their proper storing location.

Note If the vehicle is equipped with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre

pressures using the SET button on the centre console.

The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6

minutes.

Fuses

Changing a fuse

Blown fuses must be rep

If and when 263

Safety Fir Technical Data

tected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-

en the overload (caused for example by frozen

.

es and never replace them with fuses with a ply could result in fire. This could also cause electrical system.

lows again after a short time, the electrical

qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Amps

5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

80

100

150

200

Altea_EN.book Seite 263 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel

Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.

Identify the fuse corresponding to the damaged electric

consumer page 265.

Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the

blown fuse and pull the fuse out.

Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)

with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.

Fuse cover in engine compartment

Switch off the ignition and its failed electrical component.

Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing

the tabs towards the centre of the cover page 262, fig. 181.

Identify the fuse for the failed component page 265.

Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end

of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.

Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)

with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.

Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter

the fuse box.

The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located

behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand

side of the engine compartment.

The electric windows are pro

ically after a few seconds wh

windows) has been corrected

Fuses colour code

WARNING

Never repair damaged fus higher rating. Failure to com damage to other parts of the

Note If a newly replaced fuse b

system must be checked by a

Colour

light brown

Red

Blue

Yellow

Natural (white)

Green

orange

Red

white

Blue

grey

violet

If and when264

Altea_EN.book Seite 264 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to

another location in the electrical system.

Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from

SEAT dealers.

In addition to the fuses listed in the following tables, there are other fuses

which must be replaced by the Technical Service Workshop.

If and when 265

Safety Fir Technical Data

ith START STOP 5

io with START STOP 15

ng aid) / Gear lever/ ESP switch- 10

sensor/ Alarm horn 5

sensor / Light switch 10

installation assistant 15

20

ing display) without START STOP 10

er motor 20

/ socket 20

40

it (coupling) 15

Consumer Amps

Altea_EN.book Seite 265 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fuses on left side of dash panel

Fuses

Number Consumer Amps

1 Vacant

2 Vacant

3 Vacant

4 Vacant

5 Vacant

6 Vacant

7 Vacant

8 Vacant

9 Airbag 5

10 RSE input (roof screen) 10

11 Vacant

12 Left xenon headlight 10

13

Instrument panel (oil level)/Switchboard wiring

(BCM)/Heater / ABS, ESP/ Park Pilot/ Gate-

way/Flow meter

5

14 Gearbox/Power steering/Brake light sensor/

Trailer/ ABS, ESP/ Haldex/ Light switch 10

15

Heated windscreen / Instrument lighting / Diag-

nosis switchboard/Engine management/Addi-

tional heating/AFS headlamps/Park Pilot

10

16 Right xenon headlight 10

17 Engine management / RSE system with START

STOP 10

18 Kombi / levers w

19 Navigation/ rad

20 Park Pilot (parki

board

21 Vacant

22 Volumetric alarm

23 Diagnosis / Rain

24 Trailer hook pre-

25 Vacant

26 Vacuum pump

27 RSE supply (Ceil

28 Rear window wip

29 Vacant

30 Cigarette lighter

31 Vacant

32 Vacant

33 Heater

34 Vacant

35 Vacant

36 Vacant

37 Vacant

38 Vacant

39 Trailer control un

Number

If and when266

, while correct at the time of printing, is subject

should occur, please refer to the sticker on the

correct information for your model.

mpartment, left part

Consumer Amps

rs 20

30

it 5

20

15

l/Steering column 5

40

15

om Navigator 5

ent 5

ent 10

l unit 5

odule supply 15

odule supply 30

20

Altea_EN.book Seite 266 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain

models or are optional extras.

Please note that the above list

to alterations. If discrepancies

inside of the fuse cover for the

Fuses layout, engine co

Fuses

40 Trailer control unit (turn signals, brakes and left

side) 20

41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reverse light and

right side) 20

42 BCM wiring switchboard 20

43 Trailer pre-installation 40

44 Heated rear window 25

45 Electric windows (front) 30

46 Rear electric windows 30

47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay) 15

48 Convenience controls 20

49 Heating controls 40

50 Heated seats 30

51 Sunroof 20

52 Headlight washer system 20

53 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20

54 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 5

55 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20

56 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 15

57 Telephone power supply with START STOP 10

58 Central locking control unit 30

Number Consumer Amps

Number

1 Windscreen wipe

2 DQ200 gearbox

3 Cable control un

4 ABS

5 AQ gearbox

6 Instrument pane

7 Ignition key

8 Radio

9 Telephone/TomT

10 Engine managem

Engine managem

11 Vacant

12 Electronic contro

13 Petrol injection m

Diesel injection m

14 Coil

If and when 267

Safety Fir Technical Data

st turn off the failed component.

Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a

condensation on the mirror surface, thus

d by one of the same type. The type is inscribed

ss part or on the base.

keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the

e bulbs, which are essential for road safety,

.

e* 6)

bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given

e removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made

m incorporated.

5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5

n bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-

ange the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.

Altea_EN.book Seite 267 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Bulb change

General notes

Before changing any bulb, fir

Do not touch the bulb glass.

reduction in the bulb life and

reducing efficiency.

A bulb should only be replace

on the bulb, either on the gla

It is highly recommended to

very least, the following spar

should be kept in the vehicle

Main headlights

Dipped beam - H7

Main beam - H1

Position - W5W

Turn signal - PY21W

Xenon headlights25)/adaptiv

Dipped and full beam - D1S2

Daylight - P21W SLL

Position W5W

Turn signals PY21W

15 Engine management 5

Pump relay 10

16 Right lighting 30

17 Horn 15

18 Vacant

19 Clean 30

20 Water pump 10

Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20

21a) Lambda probe 15

22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5

23a)

Engine management 5

Engine management 10

Engine management 15

24 AKF, gearbox valve 10

25a) ABS pump 40

26 Left lighting 30

27a) Engine management 40

Engine management 50

28 Vacant

29a) Electric windows (front and back) 50

Electric windows (front) 30

30 Ignition key 50

a) Ampere rating according to motorisation

Number Consumer Amps

25) On this type of headlight, the

that complex elements must b

on the automatic control syste 26) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.

times more than that of haloge

stances, there is no need to ch

If and when268

Fig. 182 Main headlight bulbs

Altea_EN.book Seite 268 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Fog lights

Fog lights - H3

Upper tail light

Stop/Position - P21W27)

Turn signal - R10W

Lower tail light

Fog light - P21W

Reverse light - P21W

Side turn signal

Side turn signal - W5W

Number plate light

Number plate light - C5W

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has

no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the

lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be

demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest

of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.

Due to the difficulty in accessing some of the bulbs, any replacement work

should be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of

how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.

Main headlight bulbs

Turn signal

Dipped beam headlights

Main beam headlights

Side lights

27) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it

will not work in either position or Stop.

AA

AB

AC

AD

If and when 269

Safety Fir Technical Data

ts

Fig. 184 Dipped beam headlights

Fig. 185 Dipped beam headlights

Altea_EN.book Seite 269 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Turn signal bulbs

Raise the bonnet.

Rotate the bulb holder fig. 183 to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at

the same time to the left.

Installation is done in the reverse order.

Dipped beam headligh

Raise the bonnet.

Fig. 183 Turn signal

AA

If and when270

. 186 by pulling on this.

fig. 187 from the bulb.

187 inwards and to the right.

the replacement so that it sits correctly

reflector.

he reverse order.

Fig. 187 Main beam headlights

AC

A1

A2

Altea_EN.book Seite 270 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Remove the loops page 269, fig. 184 in the direction of

the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove the connector page 269, fig. 185 from the bulb.

Unclip the retainer spring page 269, fig. 185 pressing

inwards to the right.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the

attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.

Main beam headlights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fig

Remove the connector

Press the spring fig.

Extract the bulb and fit

into the cut-out on the

Installation is done in t

A1

A2

A3

Fig. 186 Main beam headlights

If and when 271

Safety Fir Technical Data

r fig. 189 outwards.

lling it out and inserting the replacement.

the reverse order.

A1

Altea_EN.book Seite 271 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Side lights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fig. 188 by pulling on this.

Extract the bulb holde

Replace the bulb by pu

Installation is done in

Tail lights

Side lights

Brake lights

Turn signals

Reverse lights

Rear fog lightFig. 188 Side lights

Fig. 189 Side lights

AD

If and when272

e luggage compartment lateral panel.

ing fig. 191 securing the tail light.

under the plastic fitting may help to

l light from its casing taking care not to

r connector.

ge 273, fig. 192 from the bulb holder

otate to the left then fit the replacement.

in reverse order, taking special care when

The metal contacts of the bulb holder

ly fitted with respect to the tail light

AB

AC

Altea_EN.book Seite 272 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Side lights and brake lights

Open the tailgate.

Remove the bolts fig. 190 .

Remove the cover of th

Unscrew the plastic fitt

Inserting a screwdriver

loosen it.

Partially remove the tai

pull on the cable.

Remove the bulb holde

Unscrew the bolts pa

and pull on this.

Press on the bulb and r

To refit follow the steps

fitting the bulb holder.

ends should be correct

contacts.

Fig. 190 Side lights and brake lights

Fig. 191 Side lights and brake lights

AA

If and when 273

Safety Fir Technical Data

ig. 192 from the bulb holder and pull

l bulb holder using a screw driver in the

fig. 193.

lb by pressing it down and rotating to the

the reverse order.

light

to the left, and remove it in the direction

.

essing on it and rotating at the same time

AC

Fig. 194 Lamp on interior side of bumper

Altea_EN.book Seite 273 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Turn signal light

Remove the diode from its housing page 272.

Unscrew the bolts f

on this.

Pull out the turn signa

direction of the arrow

Fit the replacement bu

left.

Installation is done in

Reverse light / rear fog

Rotate the bulb holder

of the arrow fig. 194

Replace the bulb by pr

to the left

Fig. 192 Turn signal light

Fig. 193 Turn signal light.

If and when274

lights

ssing on the inside edge of this -arrow-

screwdriver fig. 196.

Fig. 196 Luggage compartment light

Fig. 197 Luggage compartment light

Altea_EN.book Seite 274 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Side turn signals

Press the turn signal to the left or to the right to remove the bulb.

Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.

Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.

Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into

place.

First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing

the tabs fig. 195, arrow .

Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow fig. 195.

Luggage compartment

Remove the bulb by pre

using the flat side of a

Fig. 195 Side turn signal

A1

A2

If and when 275

Safety Fir Technical Data

fully using the flat side of the screwdriver

e crack as shown by the arrow fig. 198.

ing it in the direction of the arrow and

Fig. 199 Number plate light

Altea_EN.book Seite 275 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing

page 274, fig. 197.

Registration light

Remove the bulb, care

as a lever inserted in th

Remove the bulb, mov

outwards fig. 199.Fig. 198 Number plate light

If and when276

ng it in the direction of the arrow and

e a sufficient wire cross section.

use of a discharged battery, the battery can be

other vehicle to start the engine.

standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's docu-

tion must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines

l engines.

h each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

are connected.

st be properly connected to the vehicle elec-

Altea_EN.book Seite 276 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Sun visor light

Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,

as shown in the figure fig. 201.

Remove the bulb, movi

outwards fig. 201.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must hav

If the engine fails to start beca

connected to the battery of an

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with

mentation). The wire cross sec

and at least 35 mm2 for diese

Note The vehicles must not touc

soon as the positive terminals

The discharged battery mu

trical system.

Fig. 200 Removing sun visor light

Fig. 201 Removing sun visor light

If and when 277

Safety Fir Technical Data

of the black jump lead to a solid metal

olted on to the engine block, or onto the

he vehicle with the flat battery. Do not

ar the battery .

uch a way that they cannot come into

g parts in the engine compartment.

vehicle with the boosting battery and let

car with the flat battery and wait one or

ngine is running.

jump leads, switch off the headlights (if

er and heated rear window in the vehicle

is helps minimise voltage peaks which are

ads are disconnected.

nning, disconnect the leads in reverse

en above.

o they have good metal-to-metal contact with

itch off the starter after about 10 seconds and

inute.

AX

Altea_EN.book Seite 277 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

How to jump start: description

fig. 202 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.

Jump lead terminal connections

Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 202

terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .

2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive

terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal

on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Connect the other end

component which is b

engine block itself of t

connect it to a point ne

5. Position the leads in s

contact with any movin

Starting

6. Start the engine of the

it run at idling speed.

7. Start the engine of the

two minutes until the e

Removing the jump leads

8. Before you remove the

they are switched on).

9. Turn on the heater blow

with the flat battery. Th

generated when the le

10. When the engine is ru

order to the details giv

Connect the battery clamps s

the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, sw

try again after about half a m

Fig. 202 How to connect the jump leads

AA AB

A+

A+

A-

If and when278

Altea_EN.book Seite 278 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 227, Working in the engine compartment.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

soon as the positive terminals are connected.

If and when 279

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing points if you use a tow-rope:

towing vehicle

til the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate

rs cautiously. If you are driving an auto-

te gently.

ke servo and power steering are not

you are towing. Brake earlier than you

ith a more gentle pressure on the brake.

towed vehicle

pe remains taut at all times when towing.

vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a

tow-bar.

elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.

pe made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic

w-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a

ence, especially when using a tow-rope. Both

h the technique required for towing. Inexperi-

mpt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.

Altea_EN.book Seite 279 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 276.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear

lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Comments

Please observe the follow

Notes for the driver of the

Drive slowly at first un

gradually.

Begin and change gea

matic vehicle, accelera

Remember that the bra

working in the vehicle

would normally, but w

Notes for the driver of the

Ensure that the tow-ro

Tow-rope or tow-bar

It is easier and safer to tow a

tow-rope if you do not have a

A tow-rope should be slightly

It is advisable to use a tow-ro

material.

Attach the tow-rope or the to

towing bracket.

Driving style

Towing requires some experi

drivers should be familiar wit

enced drivers should not atte

If and when280

ays be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the

tarting.

Fig. 203 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye

Fig. 204 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle

Altea_EN.book Seite 280 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the

tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-

loading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the

steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,

horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply

considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you

will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Put the selector lever into position N.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.

Do not tow further than 50 km.

If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front

wheels raised.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe

any regulations to the contrary.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be

tow-started.

If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,

you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be

raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.

The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The

vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be

carried out by a qualified person.

The towing eye should alw

notes on page 279, Tow-s

Trailer eyes

If and when 281

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 281 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fitting the towing eye

Take the towing ring from the on-board tool set.

Remove the front cover by pressing down on its left-hand side.

Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the

lower slot and lever gently.

Screw the towing eye as shown by the arrow anti-clockwise to the

limit position in the front page 280, fig. 203 or rear

page 280, fig. 204 threaded hole.

Altea_EN.book Seite 282 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

General notes on the technical data 283

Safety Fir Technical Data

ons used in this paragraph of the Technical Data

- Meaning

Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine

power.

Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.

Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.

Carbon dioxide

Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance

of petrol.

Altea_EN.book Seite 283 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Technical Data

General notes on the technical data

Outstanding information

Important considerations

All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence

over this data.

All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The

vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle

registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,

for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbreviati

Abbrevia tion

kW

PS

rpm

Nm

l/100 km

g/km

CO2

CN

RON

General notes on the technical data284

he inside of the spare wheel recess in the

rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 205

in the Maintenance Programme.

r

ber (chassis number)

ne power output

letters

ior trim code

s

ided in the Maintenance Programme.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) motorway

/ CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed

Altea_EN.book Seite 284 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Vehicle identification data

The most important data are given on the identification plate

and the vehicle data sticker.

Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-

ment.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside

the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-

hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located

on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on t

luggage compartment.

The following information is p

These data are also provided

Production control numbe

Vehicle identification num

Model code number

Model designation / engi

Engine and gearbox code

Paintwork number / inter

Optional equipment code

Consumption values

CO2 emissions values

Data from 2 to 9 are also prov

Consumption figures and CO2

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (l/100 km)

Fig. 205 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compart- ment)

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

General notes on the technical data 285

Safety Fir Technical Data

vary from quoted test values, depending on

nd traffic conditions, the weather and the

ic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity

he figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the

onal equipment fittings or for the addition of

e vehicle will increase .

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions

xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the

vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.

Altea_EN.book Seite 285 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Data on fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle

data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the

vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle

weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox

combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the

EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-

istic test method based on normal everyday driving.

The following test conditions are applied:

Note Actual consumption may

personal driving style, road a

vehicle condition.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the bas

and without optional extras. T

weight of the driver.

For special versions and opti

accessories, the weight of th

WARNING

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.

Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v

Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving

is then simulated.

Extra urban

cycle

In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently

accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday

driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.

Total con-

sumption

The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting

of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra

urban cycle.

CO2 emis-

sions

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to

calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is

then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emis-

sions.

General notes on the technical data286

ins, wheel bolts

ure values can be found on the inside of the

lues given there are for cold tyres. Do not

sures of warm tyres .

ly to the front wheels.

of this manual.

nged, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

y wheels is 120 Nm.

least once per month. Checking tyre pressure tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is

ents, particularly at high speeds.

bolts is too low, they could loosen while the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,

can be damaged.

our Authorised Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

Altea_EN.book Seite 286 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive

trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are

valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain

circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-

tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these

data .

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint

of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow

approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the

road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,

empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a

wheelbase of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a

legal stipulation for a drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow cha

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre press

tank flap. The tyre pressure va

reduce the slightly raised pres

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted on

Consult the chapter wheels

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been cha

should be checked as soon as

ening torque for steel and allo

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at value is very important. If the an increased danger of accid

If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads

Note We recommend that you ask y

about appropriate wheel, tyre

Technical Data 287

Safety Fir Technical Data

ions, instructions and restrictions on the tech-

Altea_EN.book Seite 287 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Technical Data

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the

vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,

otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Engine oil dipstick

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components

mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 227.

Overview

You will find further explanat

nical data as of page 283.

Fig. 206 Diagram for the location of the various elements

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Technical Data288

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

Altea_EN.book Seite 288 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weight

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3600-3800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1390

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) Slight power loss.

Maximum speed in km/h 169

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 14,8

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1886

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1366

Gross front axle weight in kg 940

Gross rear axle weight in kg 984

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 680

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000

Technical Data 289

Safety Fir Technical Data

Running on petrol

75 (102)/ 5600

148/ 3800

4/ 1595

Super 95 octane rating or

Regular 91 octane ratinga)

Running on petrol

181

8,9

13,2

Running on petrol

1920

1395

Altea_EN.book Seite 289 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres

Running on LPG

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 72 (98)/ 5600

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 144/ 3800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1595

Fuel LPG

a) Slight power loss.

Running on LPG

Maximum speed in km/h 178

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,8

Running on LPG

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1951

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1456

Technical Data290

967

980

75

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

Altea_EN.book Seite 290 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS)

Engine specifications

Gross front axle weight in kg 965

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1000

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 720

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.1 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500-4000

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1390

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) With a slight power loss

Technical Data 291

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 291 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 194

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,3

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1959

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1439

Gross front axle weight in kg 1008

Gross rear axle weight in kg 987

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 710

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres

Technical Data292

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

Automatic

210

5,8

8,4

Automatic

2015

1495

1062

994

75

Altea_EN.book Seite 292 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 118 (160)4500-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-4500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/1798

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) Slight power loss.

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 210

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,4

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1995

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1475

Gross front axle weight in kg 1062

Gross rear axle weight in kg 994

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data 293

Safety Fir Technical Data

Automatic

740

1500

1400

Altea_EN.book Seite 293 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 66 kW (90 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Manual

Trailer without brakes 730

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 66 (90)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 210/1800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/1896

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 172

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 14,3

Technical Data294

Altea_EN.book Seite 294 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS)

Engine specifications

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2000

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1480

Gross front axle weight in kg 1045

Gross rear axle weight in kg 980

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/ 4400

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/1598

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Technical Data 295

Safety Fir Technical Data

Automatic

183

8

12,4

Automatic

1995

1475

1065

960

75

Automatic

730

1500

1400

Altea_EN.book Seite 295 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 183

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,2

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1975

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1455

Gross front axle weight in kg 1045

Gross rear axle weight in kg 960

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Manual

Trailer without brakes 720

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data296

Altea_EN.book Seite 296 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS). With Start-Stop system

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weight

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/ 4400

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/1598

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 183

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,2

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1970

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1450

Gross front axle weight in kg 1045

Gross rear axle weight in kg 960

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 720

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Technical Data 297

Safety Fir Technical Data

Altea_EN.book Seite 297 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 PS). With/without DPF

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/1896

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 183

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,3

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2000

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1480

Gross front axle weight in kg 1045

Gross rear axle weight in kg 980

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data298

Automatic

201

6,7

9,8

Altea_EN.book Seite 298 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 201

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,9

Technical Data 299

Safety Fir Technical Data

Automatic

2060

1540

1105

980

75

Altea_EN.book Seite 299 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2025

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1070

Gross rear axle weight in kg 975

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data300

Rear

1,509 mm

1,523 mm

Altea_EN.book Seite 300 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4,282 mm/ 1,768 mm

Height at kerb weight 1,546 mm

Front and rear projection 916 mm/ 788 mm

Wheelbase 2,578 mm

Turning circle 10.7 m

Track widtha)

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Front

1,525 mm

1,539 mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

Index 301

tery

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

re setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

iesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

ke assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

ke pedal

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 201

ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

changes

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

defect

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 169

Altea_EN.book Seite 301 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Index

A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

AFS (cornering lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Air conditioner

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Air conditioner automatic mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Air conditioner*

2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Air recirculation mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Alarm system

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*

Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 130

Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 130

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Automatic gearbox

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox . . 178

Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window

129

Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 150

B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Bat

Befo

Biod

Biod

Bon

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bulb

Bulb

Buz

Index302

seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

partment for on-board documentation . . 140

rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

rols

lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

xterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

ght switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

enience closing

liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

enience opening

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

ant level

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

ant temperature

auge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ct adjustment of front seat head restraints . .

13

ct adjustment of rear seat head restraints

-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Altea_EN.book Seite 302 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Automatic locking system for involuntary

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Automatic speed dependent locking and un-

locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Central locking button

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Changing gear

See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Changing the bulbs

Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Changing the main headlight bulbs

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Turn signal bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Changing the tail lights

Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Reverse light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 237

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 242

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Child seats

on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Climatronic

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Cloth

Cloth

Cock

Com

Cont

Cont

Cont

E

E

li

S

Conv

S

W

Conv

W

Cool

W

Cool

Cool

W

Cool

Cool

G

S

Corre

Corre

In

Index 303

licate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

t filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

amic cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

amic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 118

nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

trical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 170

tronic Stability Programme . . . . . . . . . 85, 195

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

tronic stability programme (ESP)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

rgency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . 120, 193

rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

rgency opening

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ssion control system

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

ine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

ine compartment

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 227

ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

ine fault

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Altea_EN.book Seite 303 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Correct sitting position

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Cruise control system

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Cruise control*

Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 190

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Diesel engine

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Differential lock fault (EDL)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Disabling front passenger airbag

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Disabling the airbag

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Display (without warning or information texts) . 61

Displays in the multifunction display

Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Disposal

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Doors

Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 194

Driver

See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driveshaft differential

XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Driving

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Economically / Environmentally friendly . . 203

With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic

gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Dup

Dus

Dyn

Dyn

E Eco

EDL

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Eme

Eme

Eme

Emi

Eng

Eng

Eng

Eng

Index304

Tank

pening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

tank

ee Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ral overview of the engine compartment 287

e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 183

rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

restraints

djusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135

djustment of the head restraint angle . . . 135

emoving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

light flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Altea_EN.book Seite 304 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Engine management

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Engine oil pressure

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 84

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Environmental tip

Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 203

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 195

See also Electronic Stability Programme . . 168

Example of menu use

Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 69

To activate and deactivate the speed limit

warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Example of the use of the menus

Open the Configuration menu with the MFI lever

68

Open the Configuration menu with the steering

wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Examples of menu use

Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 119

Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Folding tray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44

Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Front seat adjustment

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Fuel

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Fuel level

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Fuel

O

Fuel

S

Fuel:

Fuse

G G 12

Gear

Gene

Glov

Glow

W

GRA

H Hand

W

Haza

Head

A

A

R

Head

Head

Index 305

n beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 121

n beam headlights

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

n headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

ntenance

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

ntenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

ual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ual mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

IA-IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ors

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

ile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . 220

ti-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ti-purpose mobile storage compartment* . 147

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

ber of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Altea_EN.book Seite 305 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Headlights

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Heated rear window

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Information messages in the display . . . . . . . . . 66

Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Instrument panel menus

Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Interior front light, type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Interior front light, type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

J Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Load compartment in the luggage compartment

See Loading the luggage compartment . . . . 17

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 173, 222

LPG system

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Filler neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

See also Loading the luggage compartment 17

Luggage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

M Mai

Mai

Mai

Mai

Mai

Man

Man

MED

MFI

Mirr

Mob

Mul

Mul

N Num

Index306

shelf

torage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

mmended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

stration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

ote control key

uttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

ynchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

oving and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

irs

irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

acement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

ounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

rse gear

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

back function

liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

storage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

ing in

ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Altea_EN.book Seite 306 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

One-touch opening and closing

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 73

Overview

Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

P Paintwork

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Passenger

See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Power assisted steering

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 210

R Radio frequency remote control

Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Radio navigation controls on the steering wheel

Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Rear drink holder*

Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Rear fog light

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Rear

S

Rear

Reco

Refu

Regi

Rem

B

S

Rem

Repa

A

Repl

Repl

Rev c

Reve

M

Roll-

S

W

Roof

Roof

Roof

Rubb

Run-

Runn

E

Index 307

t-Stop

Deactivating and activating . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

m jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

ring wheel audio controls

Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

ring wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 167

rage area

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Other storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

rage compartment

Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

rage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 143

visor

Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

tch

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

tches

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Altea_EN.book Seite 307 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

S Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety instructions

Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Safety notes

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 45

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Safety system - Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 136, 138

Seat belt position

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Seat belt tensioner

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Sitting position

Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 286

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate

filter

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 171

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 171

After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 171

Star

Stea

Stee

Stee

Stee

Sto

Sto

Sto

Sun

Sun

Swi

Swi

Swi

T Tail

Index308

cle Maintenance

xterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

cle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

cle paintwork

aintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

roducts for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 210

cle tools

torage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

cle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

ilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

metric sensor*

ctivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

eactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

ing messages in the display . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ing reports

ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ing triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 212

r

arning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 236

r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

ring suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Altea_EN.book Seite 308 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Tank

Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

TCS (Traction control system)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Tow starting

Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Traction control system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Trailer

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Trailer turn signals

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Tyre Mobility System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . . 260

Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 253

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Tyre pressure warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 260

Tyres and wheels

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 244

U Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Unlocking and locking

Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Vehi

E

Vehi

Vehi

M

P

Vehi

S

Vehi

Vent

Volu

A

D

W Warn

Warn

Warn

Warn

R

Y

Warn

Was

Was

Was

Wate

W

Wate

Wea

Wea

Index 309

Altea_EN.book Seite 309 Donnerstag, 1. April 2010 4:25 16

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 286

Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 286

Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30

Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?

13

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21, 30

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Windscreen washer fluid

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Windscreen wiper blades

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . 238

Winter driving

Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 227

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.02.10

Portada ALTEA_interior.qxd:maquetacin 30/3/10 12:16 Pgina 3

A LT

EA O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s 5

P0 01

20 03

D P

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Altea Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Altea as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Altea. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Altea 2010 v2 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.